diff --git a/OJ_Template/Bibliography.bib b/OJ_Template/Bibliography.bib new file mode 100644 index 0000000..67890f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/OJ_Template/Bibliography.bib @@ -0,0 +1,212 @@ +@article{schneier_modeling_1999, + title = {Modeling {Security} {Threats}}, + url = {https://www.schneier.com/academic/archives/1999/12/attack_trees.html}, + author = {Schneier, Bruce}, + year = {1999}, + journal = {Dr. Dobb's Journal}, + note = {vol. 24, no.12} +} + +@article{phillips_graph-based_1998, + title = {A graph-based system for network-vulnerability analysis}, + volume = {Part F1292}, + issn = {1581131682}, + doi = {10.1145/310889.310919}, + abstract = {This paper presents a graph-based approach to network vulnerability analysis. The method is flexible, allowing analysis of attacks from both outside and inside the network. It can analyze risks to a specific network asset, or examine the universe of possible consequences following a successful attack. The graph-based tool can identify the set of attack paths that have a high probability of success (or a low "effort" cost) for the attacker. The system could be used to test the effectiveness of making configuration changes, implementing an intrusion detection system, etc. The analysis system requires as input a database of common attacks, broken into atomic steps, specific network configuration and topology information, and an attacker profile. The attack information is "matched" with the network configuration information and an attacker profile to create a superset attack graph. Nodes identify a stage of attack, for example the class of machines the attacker has accessed and the user privilege level he or she has compromised. The arcs in the attack graph represent attacks or stages of attacks. By assigning probabilities of success on the arcs or costs representing level-of-effort for the attacker, various graph algorithms such as shortest-path algorithms can identify the attack paths with the highest probability of success.}, + journal = {Proceedings New Security Paradigms Workshop}, + author = {Phillips, Cynthia and Swiler, Laura Painton}, + note = {doi: 10.1145/310889.310919}, + year = {1998}, + keywords = {Attack graph, Computer security, Network vulnerability}, + pages = {71--79}, + file = {310889.310919:/home/noah/Zotero/storage/JMW5DI72/310889.310919.pdf:application/pdf}, +} + +@article{ou_scalable_2006, + title = {A {Scalable} {Approach} to {Attack} {Graph} {Generation}}, + issn = {1595935185}, + author = {Ou, Xinming and Boyer, Wayne F and Mcqueen, Miles A}, + year = {2006}, + journal = {CCS '06: Proceedings of the 13th ACM conference on Computer and communications security}, + keywords = {attack graphs, enterprise network security, logic-programming}, + pages = {336--345}, + file = {1180405.1180446:/home/noah/Zotero/storage/TJKHVC4R/1180405.1180446.pdf:application/pdf}, +} + +@misc{j_hale_compliance_nodate, + title = {Compliance {Method} for a {Cyber}-{Physical} {System}}, + author = {{J. Hale} and Hawrylak, P. and Papa, M.}, + note = {U.S. Patent Number 9,471,789, Oct. 18, 2016.}, + number = {9471789}, + file = {Complaince_Graph_US_Patent_9471789:/home/noah/Zotero/storage/55BZN4U7/Complaince_Graph_US_Patent_9471789.pdf:application/pdf}, +} + +@inproceedings{baloyi_guidelines_2019, + address = {Skukuza South Africa}, + title = {Guidelines for {Data} {Privacy} {Compliance}: {A} {Focus} on {Cyberphysical} {Systems} and {Internet} of {Things}}, + doi = {10.1145/3351108.3351143}, + booktitle = {{SAICSIT} '19: {Proceedings} of the {South} {African} {Institute} of {Computer} {Scientists} and {Information} {Technologists} 2019}, + publisher = {Association for Computing Machinery}, + author = {Baloyi, Ntsako and Kotzé, Paula}, + year = {2019}, +} + +@article{allman_complying_2006, + title = {Complying with {Compliance}: {Blowing} it off is not an option.}, + volume = {4}, + number = {7}, + journal = {ACM Queue}, + author = {Allman, Eric}, + year = {2006}, +} + +@article{sheyner_automated_2002, + title = {Automated {Generation} and {Analysis} of {Attack} {Graphs}}, + issn = {9781787284395}, + journal = {Proceeding of 2002 IEEE Symposium on Security and Privacy}, + author = {Sheyner, O. and Haines, J. and Jha, S. and Lippmann, R.. and Wing, J.}, + year = {2002}, + pages = {254--265}, + file = {sheyner-wing02:/home/noah/Zotero/storage/BV6NHT6L/sheyner-wing02.pdf:application/pdf}, +} + +@article{zhang_boosting_2017, + title = {Boosting the performance of {FPGA}-based graph processor using hybrid memory cube: {A} case for breadth first search}, + issn = {9781450343541}, + doi = {10.1145/3020078.3021737}, + abstract = {Large graph processing has gained great attention in recent years due to its broad applicability from machine learning to social science. Large real-world graphs, however, are inherently difficult to process efficiently, not only due to their large memory footprint, but also that most graph algorithms entail memory access patterns with poor locality and a low compute-to-memory access ratio. In this work, we leverage the exceptional random access performance of emerging Hybrid Memory Cube (HMC) technology that stacks multiple DRAM dies on top of a logic layer, combined with the flexibility and efficiency of FPGA to address these challenges. To our best knowledge, this is the first work that implements a graph processing system on a FPGA-HMC platform based on software/hardware co-design and co-optimization. We first present the modifications of algorithm and a platform-aware graph processing architecture to perform level-synchronized breadth first search (BFS) on FPGA-HMC platform. To gain better insights into the potential bottlenecks of proposed implementation, we develop an analytical performance model to quantitatively evaluate the HMC access latency and corresponding BFS performance. Based on the analysis, we propose a two-level bitmap scheme to further reduce memory access and perform optimization on key design parameters (e.g. memory access granularity). Finally, we evaluate the performance of our BFS implementation using the AC-510 development kit from Micron. We achieved 166 million edges traversed per second (MTEPS) using GRAPH500 benchmark on a random graph with a scale of 25 and an edge factor of 16, which significantly outperforms CPU and other FPGA-based large graph processors.}, + journal = {FPGA 2017 - Proceedings of the 2017 ACM/SIGDA International Symposium on Field-Programmable Gate Arrays}, + author = {Zhang, Jialiang and Khoram, Soroosh and Li, Jing}, + year = {2017}, + pages = {207--216}, + file = {Boosting the Performance of FPGA-based Graph Processor using Hybrdi Memory Cube:/home/noah/Zotero/storage/CDKPUXYF/Boosting the Performance of FPGA-based Graph Processor using Hybrdi Memory Cube.pdf:application/pdf}, +} + +@inproceedings{Monotonicity, + author = {Ammann, Paul and Wijesekera, Duminda and Kaushik, Saket}, + title = {Scalable, Graph-Based Network Vulnerability Analysis}, + year = {2002}, + isbn = {1581136129}, + publisher = {Association for Computing Machinery}, + address = {New York, NY, USA}, + url = {https://doi.org/10.1145/586110.586140}, + doi = {10.1145/586110.586140}, + abstract = {Even well administered networks are vulnerable to attack. Recent work in network security has focused on the fact that combinations of exploits are the typical means by which an attacker breaks into a network. Researchers have proposed a variety of graph-based algorithms to generate attack trees (or graphs). Either structure represents all possible sequences of exploits, where any given exploit can take advantage of the penetration achieved by prior exploits in its chain, and the final exploit in the chain achieves the attacker's goal. The most recent approach in this line of work uses a modified version of the model checker NuSMV as a powerful inference engine for chaining together network exploits, compactly representing attack graphs, and identifying minimal sets of exploits. However, it is also well known that model checkers suffer from scalability problems, and there is good reason to doubt whether a model checker can handle directly a realistic set of exploits for even a modest-sized network. In this paper, we revisit the idea of attack graphs themselves, and argue that they represent more information explicitly than is necessary for the analyst. Instead, we propose a more compact and scalable representation. Although we show that it is possible to produce attack trees from our representation, we argue that more useful information can be produced, for larger networks, while bypassing the attack tree step. Our approach relies on an explicit assumption of monotonicity, which, in essence, states that the precondition of a given exploit is never invalidated by the successful application of another exploit. In other words, the attacker never needs to backtrack. The assumption reduces the complexity of the analysis problem from exponential to polynomial, thereby bringing even very large networks within reach of analysis}, + booktitle = {Proceedings of the 9th ACM Conference on Computer and Communications Security}, + pages = {217–224}, + numpages = {8}, + keywords = {network security, scalability, model checking, monotonic analysis, exploit, vulnerability}, + location = {Washington, DC, USA}, + series = {CCS '02} +} + +@inbook{TVA, + author = {Jajodia, Sushil and Noel, Steven}, + year = {2010}, + month = {09}, + pages = {139-154}, + title = {Topological Vulnerability Analysis}, + volume = {46}, + isbn = {978-1-4419-0139-2}, + journal = {Cyber Situational Awareness, Advances in Information Security, Volume 46. ISBN 978-1-4419-0139-2. Springer-Verlag US, 2010, p. 139}, + doi = {10.1007/978-1-4419-0140-8_7} +} + +@phdthesis{louthan_hybrid_2011, + title = {Hybrid {Attack} {Graphs} for {Modeling} {Cyber}-{Physical} {Systems}}, + author = {Louthan, G}, + school = {The {University} of {Tulsa}}, + year = {2011}, + keywords = {icle}, + file = {louthan_thesis:/home/noah/Zotero/storage/5SBCLYA3/louthan_thesis.pdf:application/pdf}, +} + +@phdthesis{cook_rage_2018, + title = {{RAGE}: {The} {Rage} {Attack} {Graph} {Engine}}, + author = {Cook, Kyle}, + school = {The {University} of {Tulsa}}, + year = {2018}, + file = {Kyle Cook Thesis:/home/noah/Zotero/storage/2SR28HM2/Kyle Cook Thesis.pdf:application/pdf}, +} + +@phdthesis{nichols_2018, + title = {{Hybrid} {Attack} {Graphs} for {Use} with a {Simulation} of a {Cyber-Physical} {System}}, + author = {Nichols, Will M.}, + school = {The {University} of {Tulsa}}, + year = {2018}, + file = {Will_Nichols_Thesis_FINAL_VER:/home/noah/Zotero/storage/8AXSZXJN/Will_Nichols_Thesis_FINAL_VER.pdf:application/pdf}, +} + +@article{ming_jo, +author = {Li, Ming and Hawrylak, Peter and Hale, John}, +title = {Strategies for Practical Hybrid Attack Graph Generation and Analysis}, +year = {2021}, +publisher = {Association for Computing Machinery}, +address = {New York, NY, USA}, +issn = {2692-1626}, +url = {https://doi.org/10.1145/3491257}, +doi = {10.1145/3491257}, +abstract = {As an analytical tool in cyber-security, an attack graph (AG) is capable of discovering multi-stage attack vectors on target computer networks. Cyber-physical systems (CPSs) comprise a special type of network that not only contains computing devices but also integrates components that operate in the continuous domain, such as sensors and actuators. Using AGs on CPSs requires that the system models and exploit patterns capture both token- and real-valued information. In this paper, we describe a hybrid AG model for security analysis of CPSs and computer networks. Specifically, we focus on two issues related to applying the model in practice: efficient hybrid AG generation and techniques for information extraction from them. To address the first issue, we present an accelerated hybrid AG generator that employs parallel programming and high performance computing (HPC). We conduct performance tests on CPU and GPU platforms to characterize the efficiency of our parallel algorithms. To address the second issue, we introduce an analytical regimen based on centrality analysis and apply it to a hybrid AG generated for a target CPS system to discover effective vulnerability remediation solutions.}, +note = {Just Accepted}, +journal = {Digital Threats}, +month = {oct}, +keywords = {cyber-physical system, high performance computing, attack graph, breadth-first search} +} + +@inproceedings{CPSIOT, +author = {Al Ghazo, Alaa T. and Ibrahim, Mariam and Ren, Hao and Kumar, Ratnesh}, +title = {A2G2V: Automated Attack Graph Generator and Visualizer}, +year = {2018}, +isbn = {9781450358606}, +publisher = {Association for Computing Machinery}, +address = {New York, NY, USA}, +url = {https://doi.org/10.1145/3215466.3215468}, +doi = {10.1145/3215466.3215468}, +abstract = {The Internet of Things (IoT) and Cyber-Physical Systems (CPS) technologies have increased the complexity of systems and also exposed them to additional vulnerabilities. Attack-graphs are graphical representations that provide a complete view of how inter-dependencies among atomic vulnerabilities may be exploited by an adversary to stitch together an attack that can compromise the system. Their manual construction is tedious, error-prone, and time consuming. This paper presents a model-based Automated Attack-Graph Generator and Visualizer (A2G2V). Given the networked system description (its components, connectivity, services it supports, their vulnerabilities and protections), the attack graph enlists set of all possible sequences in which atomic-level vulnerabilities can be exploited to compromise a certain system-level security. The proposed A2G2V tool extends an existing formal methods tool (a model-checker) by integrating with it an architecture description tool, our own code (for parsing counterexamples, encoding those for specification relaxation, iterating till all attack sequences are revealed), and also a graph visualization tool.}, +booktitle = {Proceedings of the 1st ACM MobiHoc Workshop on Mobile IoT Sensing, Security, and Privacy}, +articleno = {3}, +numpages = {6}, +keywords = {Model Checking, Security, Enumerating Counterexamples, Internet of Things, Attack Graph, Cyber-Physical Systems}, +location = {Los Angeles, CA, USA}, +series = {Mobile IoT SSP'18} +} + +@article{10.1145/3105760, +author = {Mu\~{n}oz-Gonz\'{a}lez, Luis and Sgandurra, Daniele and Paudice, Andrea and Lupu, Emil C.}, +title = {Efficient Attack Graph Analysis through Approximate Inference}, +year = {2017}, +issue_date = {August 2017}, +publisher = {Association for Computing Machinery}, +address = {New York, NY, USA}, +volume = {20}, +number = {3}, +issn = {2471-2566}, +url = {https://doi.org/10.1145/3105760}, +doi = {10.1145/3105760}, +abstract = {Attack graphs provide compact representations of the attack paths an attacker can follow to compromise network resources from the analysis of network vulnerabilities and topology. These representations are a powerful tool for security risk assessment. Bayesian inference on attack graphs enables the estimation of the risk of compromise to the system’s components given their vulnerabilities and interconnections and accounts for multi-step attacks spreading through the system. While static analysis considers the risk posture at rest, dynamic analysis also accounts for evidence of compromise, for example, from Security Information and Event Management software or forensic investigation. However, in this context, exact Bayesian inference techniques do not scale well. In this article, we show how Loopy Belief Propagation—an approximate inference technique—can be applied to attack graphs and that it scales linearly in the number of nodes for both static and dynamic analysis, making such analyses viable for larger networks. We experiment with different topologies and network clustering on synthetic Bayesian attack graphs with thousands of nodes to show that the algorithm’s accuracy is acceptable and that it converges to a stable solution. We compare sequential and parallel versions of Loopy Belief Propagation with exact inference techniques for both static and dynamic analysis, showing the advantages and gains of approximate inference techniques when scaling to larger attack graphs.}, +journal = {ACM Trans. Priv. Secur.}, +month = {jul}, +articleno = {10}, +numpages = {30}, +keywords = {probabilistic graphical models, approximate inference, Bayesian networks} +} + +@ARTICLE{8290918, +author={Wang, Huan and Chen, Zhanfang and Zhao, Jianping and Di, Xiaoqiang and Liu, Dan}, +journal={IEEE Access}, +title={A Vulnerability Assessment Method in Industrial Internet of Things Based on Attack Graph and Maximum Flow}, +year={2018}, +volume={6}, +number={}, +pages={8599-8609}, +doi={10.1109/ACCESS.2018.2805690} +} + +@inproceedings{centrality_based, +author = {Gonda, Tom and Pascal, Tal and Puzis, Rami and Shani, Guy and Shapira, Bracha}, +year = {2018}, +month = {09}, +pages = {}, +title = {Analysis of Attack Graph Representations for Ranking Vulnerability Fixes}, +doi = {10.29007/2c1q} +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/TC_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.aux b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.aux similarity index 55% rename from TC_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.aux rename to OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.aux index 41a2602..b244b91 100644 --- a/TC_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.aux +++ b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.aux @@ -1,6 +1,4 @@ \relax -\providecommand\babel@aux[2]{} -\@nameuse{bbl@beforestart} \citation{phillips_graph-based_1998} \citation{schneier_modeling_1999} \citation{ou_scalable_2006} @@ -9,12 +7,10 @@ \citation{8290918} \citation{centrality_based} \citation{j_hale_compliance_nodate,baloyi_guidelines_2019,allman_complying_2006} +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {I}INTRODUCTION}{1}{}\protected@file@percent } \citation{sheyner_automated_2002} \citation{ou_scalable_2006} \citation{zhang_boosting_2017} -\babel@aux{nil}{} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}Introduction}{1}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{sec:introduction}{{1}{1}} \citation{Monotonicity} \citation{TVA} \citation{ou_scalable_2006} @@ -24,58 +20,53 @@ \citation{louthan_hybrid_2011} \citation{louthan_hybrid_2011} \citation{cook_rage_2018} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {2}Related Work}{2}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{sec:sync-lit}{{2}{2}} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {3}Inseparable Features}{2}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{sec:inseparable}{{3}{2}} -\@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {1}{\ignorespaces A network without Synchronous Firing generating infeasible states}}{2}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{fig:non-sync_ex}{{1}{2}} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {4}Implementing Synchronous Firing}{2}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{sec:implementing}{{4}{2}} +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {II}Related Work}{2}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{sec:sync-lit}{{II}{2}} +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {III}Inseparable Features}{2}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{sec:inseparable}{{III}{2}} \citation{cook_rage_2018} \citation{louthan_hybrid_2011} +\@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {1}{\ignorespaces A network without Synchronous Firing generating infeasible states}}{3}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{fig:non-sync_ex}{{1}{3}} +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {IV}Implementing Synchronous Firing}{3}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{sec:implementing}{{IV}{3}} +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {A}GNU Bison and Flex}{3}{}\protected@file@percent } +\@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {2}{\ignorespaces Inclusion of Synchronous Firing into GNU Bison, GNU Flex, and the overall program}}{3}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{fig:bison-flex}{{2}{3}} \citation{nichols_2018} \citation{cook_rage_2018} \citation{cook_rage_2018} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {4.1}GNU Bison and Flex}{3}{}\protected@file@percent } -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {4.2}PostgreSQL}{3}{}\protected@file@percent } -\@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {2}{\ignorespaces Inclusion of Synchronous Firing into GNU Bison, GNU Flex, and the overall program}}{3}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{fig:bison-flex}{{2}{3}} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {4.3}Compound Operators}{3}{}\protected@file@percent } -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {4.4}Graph Generation}{4}{}\protected@file@percent } -\@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {3}{\ignorespaces Synchronous Firing in the Graph Generation Process}}{4}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{fig:sync-fire}{{3}{4}} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {5}Results}{4}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{sec:Results}{{5}{4}} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {5.1}Experimental Networks and Computing Platform}{4}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{sec:test-platform}{{5.1}{4}} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {5.2}Results and Analysis}{5}{}\protected@file@percent } -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsubsection}{\numberline {5.2.1}Results for the Theoretical Environment}{5}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{sec:theo_res}{{5.2.1}{5}} -\@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {4}{\ignorespaces Synchronous Firing on Runtime}}{5}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{fig:Sync-RT}{{4}{5}} -\@writefile{lot}{\contentsline {table}{\numberline {1}{\ignorespaces Results for the Non-Synchronous Firing Testing}}{5}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{table:NS-Table}{{1}{5}} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsubsection}{\numberline {5.2.2}Results for a Grouped Environment}{5}{}\protected@file@percent } +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {B}PostgreSQL}{4}{}\protected@file@percent } +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {C}Compound Operators}{4}{}\protected@file@percent } +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {D}Graph Generation}{4}{}\protected@file@percent } +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {V}Results}{4}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{sec:Results}{{V}{4}} +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {A}Experimental Networks and Computing Platform}{4}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{sec:test-platform}{{A}{4}} +\@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {3}{\ignorespaces Synchronous Firing in the Graph Generation Process}}{5}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{fig:sync-fire}{{3}{5}} +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {B}Results and Analysis}{5}{}\protected@file@percent } +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsubsection}{\numberline {1}Results for the Theoretical Environment}{5}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{sec:theo_res}{{1}{5}} +\@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {4}{\ignorespaces Synchronous Firing on Runtime}}{6}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{fig:Sync-RT}{{4}{6}} \@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {5}{\ignorespaces Bar Graph and Line Graph Representations of Synchronous Firing on State Space}}{6}{}\protected@file@percent } \newlabel{fig:Sync-State}{{5}{6}} \@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {6}{\ignorespaces Speedup (Amdahl's) Obtained When Using Synchronous Firing}}{6}{}\protected@file@percent } \newlabel{fig:Sync-Spd}{{6}{6}} -\@writefile{lot}{\contentsline {table}{\numberline {2}{\ignorespaces Results for the Synchronous Firing Testing}}{6}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{table:S-Table}{{2}{6}} -\@writefile{lot}{\contentsline {table}{\numberline {3}{\ignorespaces Results for the Comprehensive Services without Synchronous Firing}}{6}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{table:Non-Sync-Comp-Table}{{3}{6}} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {6}Future Works}{6}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{sec:fw}{{6}{6}} +\@writefile{lot}{\contentsline {table}{\numberline {1}{\ignorespaces Results for the Non-Synchronous Firing Testing}}{6}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{table:NS-Table}{{1}{6}} +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {subsubsection}{\numberline {2}Results for a Grouped Environment}{6}{}\protected@file@percent } +\@writefile{lot}{\contentsline {table}{\numberline {2}{\ignorespaces Results for the Synchronous Firing Testing}}{7}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{table:S-Table}{{2}{7}} +\@writefile{lot}{\contentsline {table}{\numberline {3}{\ignorespaces Results for the Comprehensive Services without Synchronous Firing}}{7}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{table:Non-Sync-Comp-Table}{{3}{7}} \@writefile{lot}{\contentsline {table}{\numberline {4}{\ignorespaces Results for the Comprehensive Services with Synchronous Firing}}{7}{}\protected@file@percent } \newlabel{table:Sync-Comp-Table}{{4}{7}} \@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {7}{\ignorespaces Synchronous Firing on Runtime}}{7}{}\protected@file@percent } \newlabel{fig:Comp-Sync-RT}{{7}{7}} \@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {8}{\ignorespaces Bar Graph and Line Graph Representations of Synchronous Firing with Comprehensive Services on State Space}}{7}{}\protected@file@percent } \newlabel{fig:Comp-Sync-State}{{8}{7}} -\@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {9}{\ignorespaces Speedup (Amdahl's) Obtained When Using Synchronous Firing with Comprehensive Services}}{7}{}\protected@file@percent } -\newlabel{fig:Comp-Sync-Spd}{{9}{7}} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {7}Conclusion}{7}{}\protected@file@percent } \bibdata{Bibliography} \bibcite{phillips_graph-based_1998}{1} \bibcite{schneier_modeling_1999}{2} @@ -91,10 +82,15 @@ \bibcite{sheyner_automated_2002}{12} \bibcite{zhang_boosting_2017}{13} \bibcite{Monotonicity}{14} +\@writefile{lof}{\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {9}{\ignorespaces Speedup (Amdahl's) Obtained When Using Synchronous Firing with Comprehensive Services}}{8}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{fig:Comp-Sync-Spd}{{9}{8}} +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {VI}Future Works}{8}{}\protected@file@percent } +\newlabel{sec:fw}{{VI}{8}} +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {VII}Conclusion}{8}{}\protected@file@percent } +\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{REFERENCES}{8}{}\protected@file@percent } \bibcite{TVA}{15} \bibcite{louthan_hybrid_2011}{16} \bibcite{cook_rage_2018}{17} \bibcite{nichols_2018}{18} \bibstyle{ieeetr} -\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{References}{8}{}\protected@file@percent } -\gdef \@abspage@last{8} +\gdef \@abspage@last{9} diff --git a/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.bbl b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.bbl new file mode 100644 index 0000000..453fc7e --- /dev/null +++ b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.bbl @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +\begin{thebibliography}{10} + +\bibitem{phillips_graph-based_1998} +C.~Phillips and L.~P. Swiler, ``A graph-based system for network-vulnerability + analysis,'' {\em Proceedings New Security Paradigms Workshop}, vol.~Part + F1292, pp.~71--79, 1998. +\newblock doi: 10.1145/310889.310919. + +\bibitem{schneier_modeling_1999} +B.~Schneier, ``Modeling {Security} {Threats},'' {\em Dr. Dobb's Journal}, 1999. +\newblock vol. 24, no.12. + +\bibitem{ou_scalable_2006} +X.~Ou, W.~F. Boyer, and M.~A. Mcqueen, ``A {Scalable} {Approach} to {Attack} + {Graph} {Generation},'' {\em CCS '06: Proceedings of the 13th ACM conference + on Computer and communications security}, pp.~336--345, 2006. + +\bibitem{CPSIOT} +A.~T. Al~Ghazo, M.~Ibrahim, H.~Ren, and R.~Kumar, ``A2g2v: Automated attack + graph generator and visualizer,'' in {\em Proceedings of the 1st ACM MobiHoc + Workshop on Mobile IoT Sensing, Security, and Privacy}, Mobile IoT SSP'18, + (New York, NY, USA), Association for Computing Machinery, 2018. + +\bibitem{ming_jo} +M.~Li, P.~Hawrylak, and J.~Hale, ``Strategies for practical hybrid attack graph + generation and analysis,'' {\em Digital Threats}, oct 2021. +\newblock Just Accepted. + +\bibitem{10.1145/3105760} +L.~Mu\~{n}oz Gonz\'{a}lez, D.~Sgandurra, A.~Paudice, and E.~C. Lupu, + ``Efficient attack graph analysis through approximate inference,'' {\em ACM + Trans. Priv. Secur.}, vol.~20, jul 2017. + +\bibitem{8290918} +H.~Wang, Z.~Chen, J.~Zhao, X.~Di, and D.~Liu, ``A vulnerability assessment + method in industrial internet of things based on attack graph and maximum + flow,'' {\em IEEE Access}, vol.~6, pp.~8599--8609, 2018. + +\bibitem{centrality_based} +T.~Gonda, T.~Pascal, R.~Puzis, G.~Shani, and B.~Shapira, ``Analysis of attack + graph representations for ranking vulnerability fixes,'' 09 2018. + +\bibitem{j_hale_compliance_nodate} +{J. Hale}, P.~Hawrylak, and M.~Papa, ``Compliance {Method} for a + {Cyber}-{Physical} {System}.'' +\newblock U.S. Patent Number 9,471,789, Oct. 18, 2016. + +\bibitem{baloyi_guidelines_2019} +N.~Baloyi and P.~Kotzé, ``Guidelines for {Data} {Privacy} {Compliance}: {A} + {Focus} on {Cyberphysical} {Systems} and {Internet} of {Things},'' in {\em + {SAICSIT} '19: {Proceedings} of the {South} {African} {Institute} of + {Computer} {Scientists} and {Information} {Technologists} 2019}, (Skukuza + South Africa), Association for Computing Machinery, 2019. + +\bibitem{allman_complying_2006} +E.~Allman, ``Complying with {Compliance}: {Blowing} it off is not an option.,'' + {\em ACM Queue}, vol.~4, no.~7, 2006. + +\bibitem{sheyner_automated_2002} +O.~Sheyner, J.~Haines, S.~Jha, R.~Lippmann, and J.~Wing, ``Automated + {Generation} and {Analysis} of {Attack} {Graphs},'' {\em Proceeding of 2002 + IEEE Symposium on Security and Privacy}, pp.~254--265, 2002. + +\bibitem{zhang_boosting_2017} +J.~Zhang, S.~Khoram, and J.~Li, ``Boosting the performance of {FPGA}-based + graph processor using hybrid memory cube: {A} case for breadth first + search,'' {\em FPGA 2017 - Proceedings of the 2017 ACM/SIGDA International + Symposium on Field-Programmable Gate Arrays}, pp.~207--216, 2017. + +\bibitem{Monotonicity} +P.~Ammann, D.~Wijesekera, and S.~Kaushik, ``Scalable, graph-based network + vulnerability analysis,'' in {\em Proceedings of the 9th ACM Conference on + Computer and Communications Security}, CCS '02, (New York, NY, USA), + p.~217–224, Association for Computing Machinery, 2002. + +\bibitem{TVA} +S.~Jajodia and S.~Noel, {\em Topological Vulnerability Analysis}, vol.~46, + pp.~139--154. +\newblock 09 2010. + +\bibitem{louthan_hybrid_2011} +G.~Louthan, {\em Hybrid {Attack} {Graphs} for {Modeling} {Cyber}-{Physical} + {Systems}}. +\newblock PhD thesis, The {University} of {Tulsa}, 2011. + +\bibitem{cook_rage_2018} +K.~Cook, {\em {RAGE}: {The} {Rage} {Attack} {Graph} {Engine}}. +\newblock PhD thesis, The {University} of {Tulsa}, 2018. + +\bibitem{nichols_2018} +W.~M. Nichols, {\em {Hybrid} {Attack} {Graphs} for {Use} with a {Simulation} of + a {Cyber-Physical} {System}}. +\newblock PhD thesis, The {University} of {Tulsa}, 2018. + +\end{thebibliography} diff --git a/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.blg b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.blg new file mode 100644 index 0000000..191f233 --- /dev/null +++ b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.blg @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +This is BibTeX, Version 0.99d (TeX Live 2022/Arch Linux) +Capacity: max_strings=200000, hash_size=200000, hash_prime=170003 +The top-level auxiliary file: Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.aux +The style file: ieeetr.bst +Database file #1: Bibliography.bib +Warning--empty booktitle in centrality_based +Warning--empty publisher in TVA +You've used 18 entries, + 1876 wiz_defined-function locations, + 581 strings with 6930 characters, +and the built_in function-call counts, 4246 in all, are: += -- 415 +> -- 178 +< -- 0 ++ -- 67 +- -- 49 +* -- 286 +:= -- 624 +add.period$ -- 25 +call.type$ -- 18 +change.case$ -- 14 +chr.to.int$ -- 0 +cite$ -- 20 +duplicate$ -- 230 +empty$ -- 405 +format.name$ -- 49 +if$ -- 1028 +int.to.chr$ -- 0 +int.to.str$ -- 18 +missing$ -- 15 +newline$ -- 65 +num.names$ -- 18 +pop$ -- 64 +preamble$ -- 1 +purify$ -- 0 +quote$ -- 0 +skip$ -- 138 +stack$ -- 0 +substring$ -- 202 +swap$ -- 82 +text.length$ -- 0 +text.prefix$ -- 0 +top$ -- 0 +type$ -- 0 +warning$ -- 2 +while$ -- 35 +width$ -- 20 +write$ -- 178 +(There were 2 warnings) diff --git a/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.log b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.log new file mode 100644 index 0000000..efc24be --- /dev/null +++ b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.log @@ -0,0 +1,582 @@ +This is pdfTeX, Version 3.141592653-2.6-1.40.24 (TeX Live 2022/Arch Linux) (preloaded format=pdflatex 2022.11.8) 9 NOV 2022 10:44 +entering extended mode + restricted \write18 enabled. + %&-line parsing enabled. +**Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.tex +(./Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.tex +LaTeX2e <2021-11-15> patch level 1 +L3 programming layer <2022-04-10> (./ieeeoj.cls + +LaTeX Warning: You have requested document class `IEEEoj', + but the document class provides `IEEEphot'. + +Document Class: IEEEphot 2009/06/23 V1.2 +-- See the "IEEEphot_HOWTO" manual for usage information. +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\dimen138 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\dimen139 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\count185 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\count186 +\@IEEEtrantmptoksA=\toks16 +LaTeX Font Info: Trying to load font information for OT1+ptm on input line 3 +98. +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/psnfss/ot1ptm.fd +File: ot1ptm.fd 2001/06/04 font definitions for OT1/ptm. +) +-- Using 8.25in x 10.75in (IEEE Photonics PaperSize) paper. +-- Using PDF output. +\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\dimen140 +-- This is a 10 point document. +\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\dimen141 +\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\dimen142 +\IEEEnormaljot=\dimen143 +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/n' in size <5> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/n' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/it' in size <5> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/it' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/n' in size <7> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/n' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/it' in size <7> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/it' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/n' in size <8> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/n' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/it' in size <8> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/it' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/n' in size <10.03749> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/n' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/it' in size <10.03749> not available + +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/it' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/n' in size <10> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/n' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/it' in size <10> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/it' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/n' in size <12> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/n' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/it' in size <12> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/it' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/n' in size <17> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/n' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/it' in size <17> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/it' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/n' in size <20> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/n' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/it' in size <20> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/it' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/n' in size <18> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/n' tried instead on input line 756. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/ptm/bx/it' in size <18> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/ptm/b/it' tried instead on input line 756. +\IEEEilabelindentA=\dimen144 +\IEEEilabelindentB=\dimen145 +\IEEEilabelindent=\dimen146 +\IEEEelabelindent=\dimen147 +\IEEEdlabelindent=\dimen148 +\IEEElabelindent=\dimen149 +\IEEEiednormlabelsep=\dimen150 +\IEEEiedmathlabelsep=\dimen151 +\IEEEiedtopsep=\skip47 +\c@section=\count187 +\c@subsection=\count188 +\c@subsubsection=\count189 +\c@paragraph=\count190 +\c@IEEEsubequation=\count191 +\abovecaptionskip=\skip48 +\belowcaptionskip=\skip49 +\c@figure=\count192 +\marginfigbox=\box50 +\c@table=\count193 +\margintabbox=\box51 +\@IEEEeqnnumcols=\count194 +\@IEEEeqncolcnt=\count195 +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics/color.sty +Package: color 2021/12/07 v1.3c Standard LaTeX Color (DPC) + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics-cfg/color.cfg +File: color.cfg 2016/01/02 v1.6 sample color configuration +) +Package color Info: Driver file: pdftex.def on input line 149. + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics-def/pdftex.def +File: pdftex.def 2020/10/05 v1.2a Graphics/color driver for pdftex +)) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/generic/iftex/ifpdf.sty +Package: ifpdf 2019/10/25 v3.4 ifpdf legacy package. Use iftex instead. + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/generic/iftex/iftex.sty +Package: iftex 2022/02/03 v1.0f TeX engine tests +)) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/base/ifthen.sty +Package: ifthen 2020/11/24 v1.1c Standard LaTeX ifthen package (DPC) +) +Package color Info: Redefining color white on input line 3384. +\tempbox=\box52 +\abstractbox=\box53 +\keybox=\box54 +\@IEEEtmpitemindent=\dimen152 +\c@IEEEbiography=\count196 +\@IEEEtranrubishbin=\box55 +\footheight=\dimen153 +\typeheight=\dimen154 +\typewidth=\dimen155 +\authorcount=\count197 +\chkaucount=\count198 +\tempcount=\count199 +\affcount=\count266 + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/wrapfig/wrapfig.sty +\wrapoverhang=\dimen156 +\WF@size=\dimen157 +\c@WF@wrappedlines=\count267 +\WF@box=\box56 +\WF@everypar=\toks17 +Package: wrapfig 2003/01/31 v 3.6 +) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/tools/array.sty +Package: array 2021/10/04 v2.5f Tabular extension package (FMi) +\col@sep=\dimen158 +\ar@mcellbox=\box57 +\extrarowheight=\dimen159 +\NC@list=\toks18 +\extratabsurround=\skip50 +\backup@length=\skip51 +\ar@cellbox=\box58 +) +\quotebox=\box59 +\quoteskp=\skip52 +\sdquoteskp=\skip53 +\quotecnt=\count268 +) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/cite/cite.sty +LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 302. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \nocite on input line 332. +Package: cite 2015/02/27 v 5.5 +) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/spverbatim/spverbatim.sty +Package: spverbatim 2009/08/10 v1.0 Verbatim with breakable spaces +) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsmath/amsmath.sty +Package: amsmath 2021/10/15 v2.17l AMS math features +\@mathmargin=\skip54 + +For additional information on amsmath, use the `?' option. +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsmath/amstext.sty +Package: amstext 2021/08/26 v2.01 AMS text + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsmath/amsgen.sty +File: amsgen.sty 1999/11/30 v2.0 generic functions +\@emptytoks=\toks19 +\ex@=\dimen160 +)) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsmath/amsbsy.sty +Package: amsbsy 1999/11/29 v1.2d Bold Symbols +\pmbraise@=\dimen161 +) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsmath/amsopn.sty +Package: amsopn 2021/08/26 v2.02 operator names +) +\inf@bad=\count269 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 234. +\uproot@=\count270 +\leftroot@=\count271 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \overline on input line 399. +\classnum@=\count272 +\DOTSCASE@=\count273 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 496. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 499. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 620. +\Mathstrutbox@=\box60 +\strutbox@=\box61 +\big@size=\dimen162 +LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 743. +LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 744. +\macc@depth=\count274 +\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count275 +\dotsspace@=\muskip16 +\c@parentequation=\count276 +\dspbrk@lvl=\count277 +\tag@help=\toks20 +\row@=\count278 +\column@=\count279 +\maxfields@=\count280 +\andhelp@=\toks21 +\eqnshift@=\dimen163 +\alignsep@=\dimen164 +\tagshift@=\dimen165 +\tagwidth@=\dimen166 +\totwidth@=\dimen167 +\lineht@=\dimen168 +\@envbody=\toks22 +\multlinegap=\skip55 +\multlinetaggap=\skip56 +\mathdisplay@stack=\toks23 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \[ on input line 2938. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \] on input line 2939. +) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsfonts/amssymb.sty +Package: amssymb 2013/01/14 v3.01 AMS font symbols + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsfonts/amsfonts.sty +Package: amsfonts 2013/01/14 v3.01 Basic AMSFonts support +\symAMSa=\mathgroup4 +\symAMSb=\mathgroup5 +LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring math symbol \hbar on input line 98. +LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting math alphabet `\mathfrak' in version `bold' +(Font) U/euf/m/n --> U/euf/b/n on input line 106. +)) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/algorithms/algorithmic.sty +Package: algorithmic 2009/08/24 v0.1 Document Style `algorithmic' + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics/keyval.sty +Package: keyval 2014/10/28 v1.15 key=value parser (DPC) +\KV@toks@=\toks24 +) +\c@ALC@unique=\count281 +\c@ALC@line=\count282 +\c@ALC@rem=\count283 +\c@ALC@depth=\count284 +\ALC@tlm=\skip57 +\algorithmicindent=\skip58 +) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics/graphicx.sty +Package: graphicx 2021/09/16 v1.2d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics/graphics.sty +Package: graphics 2021/03/04 v1.4d Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics/trig.sty +Package: trig 2021/08/11 v1.11 sin cos tan (DPC) +) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics-cfg/graphics.cfg +File: graphics.cfg 2016/06/04 v1.11 sample graphics configuration +) +Package graphics Info: Driver file: pdftex.def on input line 107. +) +\Gin@req@height=\dimen169 +\Gin@req@width=\dimen170 +) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/base/textcomp.sty +Package: textcomp 2020/02/02 v2.0n Standard LaTeX package +) +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/l3backend/l3backend-pdftex.def +File: l3backend-pdftex.def 2022-04-14 L3 backend support: PDF output (pdfTeX) +\l__color_backend_stack_int=\count285 +\l__pdf_internal_box=\box62 +) +(./Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.aux) +\openout1 = `Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.aux'. + +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for TS1/cmr/m/n on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 13. + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/context/base/mkii/supp-pdf.mkii +[Loading MPS to PDF converter (version 2006.09.02).] +\scratchcounter=\count286 +\scratchdimen=\dimen171 +\scratchbox=\box63 +\nofMPsegments=\count287 +\nofMParguments=\count288 +\everyMPshowfont=\toks25 +\MPscratchCnt=\count289 +\MPscratchDim=\dimen172 +\MPnumerator=\count290 +\makeMPintoPDFobject=\count291 +\everyMPtoPDFconversion=\toks26 +) (/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/epstopdf-pkg/epstopdf-base.sty +Package: epstopdf-base 2020-01-24 v2.11 Base part for package epstopdf +Package epstopdf-base Info: Redefining graphics rule for `.eps' on input line 4 +85. + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/latexconfig/epstopdf-sys.cfg +File: epstopdf-sys.cfg 2010/07/13 v1.3 Configuration of (r)epstopdf for TeX Liv +e +)) +Package color Info: Redefining color ojcolor on input line 13. +LaTeX Font Info: Trying to load font information for OT1+phv on input line 2 +8. + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/psnfss/ot1phv.fd +File: ot1phv.fd 2020/03/25 scalable font definitions for OT1/phv. +) +** ATTENTION: \authorrefmark is deprecated (line 48). Use \IEEEauthorrefmark in +stead. +LaTeX Font Info: Trying to load font information for U+msa on input line 48. + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsfonts/umsa.fd +File: umsa.fd 2013/01/14 v3.01 AMS symbols A +) +LaTeX Font Info: Trying to load font information for U+msb on input line 48. + + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsfonts/umsb.fd +File: umsb.fd 2013/01/14 v3.01 AMS symbols B +) +** ATTENTION: \authorrefmark is deprecated (line 48). Use \IEEEauthorrefmark in +stead. +LaTeX Font Info: Calculating math sizes for size <6.6> on input line 48. + +LaTeX Font Warning: Font shape `OT1/cmr/m/n' in size <3.3> not available +(Font) size <5> substituted on input line 48. + + +LaTeX Font Warning: Font shape `OML/cmm/m/it' in size <3.3> not available +(Font) size <5> substituted on input line 48. + + +LaTeX Font Warning: Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' in size <3.3> not available +(Font) size <5> substituted on input line 48. + + +Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +File: OJIM.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: OJIM.png used on input line 61. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 75.09589pt x 28.0pt. + +Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (8.45pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (8.922pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + [1{/var/lib/texmf/fonts/map/pdftex/updmap/pdftex.map} + + + <./ojim.png>] +LaTeX Font Info: Calculating math sizes for size <10.03749> on input line 67 +. + +Underfull \vbox (badness 2990) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Underfull \vbox (badness 2990) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (11.34346pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (11.2pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + [2] +<./images/schri1.png, id=21, 1014.79124pt x 400.49625pt> +File: ./images/schri1.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri1.png used on input line 85. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 221.3985pt x 87.37611pt. +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/phv/b/it' in size <9> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/phv/b/sl' tried instead on input line 96. +LaTeX Font Info: Trying to load font information for OT1+pcr on input line 1 +00. + +(/usr/share/texmf-dist/tex/latex/psnfss/ot1pcr.fd +File: ot1pcr.fd 2001/06/04 font definitions for OT1/pcr. +) +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 102--106 + + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 6032) in paragraph at lines 102--106 +[]\OT1/ptm/m/n/10.03749 where the ``$\OML/cmm/m/it/10 <$\OT1/ptm/m/n/10.03749 g +roup name$\OML/cmm/m/it/10 >$\OT1/ptm/m/n/10.03749 " iden-ti-fier and ``group" + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 107--111 + + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 112--118 + + [] + +<./images/schri2.png, id=22, 551.05875pt x 710.655pt> +File: ./images/schri2.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri2.png used on input line 121. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 180.67499pt x 232.99875pt. + +Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active [] + +File: OJIM.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: OJIM.png used on input line 130. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 75.09589pt x 28.0pt. + +Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (8.45pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + [3 <./images/schri1.png> <./images/schri2.png>] +<./images/schri3.png, id=30, 489.83pt x 1053.9375pt> +File: ./images/schri3.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri3.png used on input line 149. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 244.9144pt x 526.96747pt. + +Overfull \vbox (11.34346pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (11.2pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + [4] +Underfull \vbox (badness 2503) has occurred while \output is active [] + +File: OJIM.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: OJIM.png used on input line 200. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 75.09589pt x 28.0pt. + +Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (8.45pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + [5 <./images/schri3.png>] +<./images/schri4.png, id=39, 602.25pt x 238.491pt> +File: ./images/schri4.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri4.png used on input line 205. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 238.49121pt x 94.44125pt. +<./images/schri5.png, id=40, 549.69pt x 236.301pt> +File: ./images/schri5.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri5.png used on input line 206. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 238.49121pt x 102.51967pt. +<./images/schri6.png, id=41, 608.163pt x 223.38pt> +File: ./images/schri6.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri6.png used on input line 213. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 238.49121pt x 87.59843pt. +<./images/schri7.png, id=42, 532.827pt x 236.739pt> +File: ./images/schri7.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri7.png used on input line 214. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 238.49121pt x 105.96442pt. +<./images/schri8.png, id=43, 533.265pt x 236.301pt> +File: ./images/schri8.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri8.png used on input line 221. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 238.49121pt x 105.68184pt. + +Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (11.34346pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (11.2pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + [6 <./images/schri4.png> <./images/schri5.png> <./images/schri6.png> <./images +/schri7.png> <./images/schri8.png>] +<./images/schri9.png, id=52, 602.25pt x 238.491pt> +File: ./images/schri9.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri9.png used on input line 333. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 238.49121pt x 94.44125pt. +<./images/schri10.png, id=53, 549.69pt x 236.301pt> +File: ./images/schri10.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri10.png used on input line 334. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 238.49121pt x 102.51967pt. +<./images/schri11.png, id=54, 600.717pt x 230.607pt> +File: ./images/schri11.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri11.png used on input line 341. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 238.49121pt x 91.555pt. +<./images/schri12.png, id=55, 532.389pt x 236.739pt> +File: ./images/schri12.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri12.png used on input line 342. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 238.49121pt x 106.05112pt. +<./images/schri13.png, id=56, 533.265pt x 236.301pt> +File: ./images/schri13.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/schri13.png used on input line 349. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 238.49121pt x 105.68184pt. + +Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active [] + +File: OJIM.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: OJIM.png used on input line 357. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 75.09589pt x 28.0pt. + +Overfull \vbox (8.45pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + [7 <./images/schri9.png> <./images/schri10.png> <./images/schri11.png> <./imag +es/schri12.png>] +Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +(./Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.bbl +Overfull \vbox (11.34346pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (11.2pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + [8 <./images/schri13.png>]) +File: OJIM.png Graphic file (type png) + +Package pdftex.def Info: OJIM.png used on input line 368. +(pdftex.def) Requested size: 75.09589pt x 28.0pt. + +Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active [] + + +Overfull \vbox (8.45pt too high) has occurred while \output is active [] + + [9 + +] +(./Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.aux) + +LaTeX Font Warning: Size substitutions with differences +(Font) up to 1.7pt have occurred. + + ) +Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: + 4284 strings out of 478238 + 67861 string characters out of 5850456 + 373145 words of memory out of 5000000 + 22438 multiletter control sequences out of 15000+600000 + 528290 words of font info for 140 fonts, out of 8000000 for 9000 + 1141 hyphenation exceptions out of 8191 + 55i,14n,62p,1197b,322s stack positions out of 5000i,500n,10000p,200000b,80000s +{/usr/share/texmf-dist/fonts/enc/dvips/base/8r.enc} +Output written on Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.pdf (9 pages, 2360480 bytes). +PDF statistics: + 124 PDF objects out of 1000 (max. 8388607) + 60 compressed objects within 1 object stream + 0 named destinations out of 1000 (max. 500000) + 71 words of extra memory for PDF output out of 10000 (max. 10000000) + diff --git a/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.pdf b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0e000e0 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.pdf differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.tex b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f538a32 --- /dev/null +++ b/OJ_Template/Schrick-Noah_AG-CG-SyncFire.tex @@ -0,0 +1,368 @@ +\documentclass{IEEEoj} +\usepackage{cite} +\usepackage{spverbatim} +\usepackage{amsmath,amssymb,amsfonts} +\usepackage{algorithmic} +\usepackage{graphicx,color} +\graphicspath{ {./images/} } +\usepackage{textcomp} +\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em + T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}} +\AtBeginDocument{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{0.93,0.59,0.15,0.02}} +\def\OJlogo{\vspace{-14pt}\includegraphics[height=28pt]{OJIM.png}} +\begin{document} +\receiveddate{09 November, 2022} +\reviseddate{XX Month, XXXX} +\accepteddate{XX Month, XXXX} +\publisheddate{XX Month, XXXX} +\currentdate{XX Month, XXXX} +\doiinfo{OJIM.2022.1234567} + +\title{State Space Explosion Mitigation for Large-Scale Attack and Compliance Graphs Using Synchronous Exploit Firing} + +\author{NOAH L. SCHRICK\authorrefmark{1}, MEMBER, IEEE, AND PETER J. HAWRYLAK\authorrefmark{2}, SENIOR MEMBER, IEEE.} +\affil{Department of Computer Science, University of Tulsa, Tulsa, +OK 74104 USA} +\corresp{CORRESPONDING AUTHOR: Noah L. Schrick (e-mail: noah-schrick@utulsa.edu).} + +\begin{abstract} +Attack and compliance graphs are useful tools for cybersecurity and regulatory or compliance analysis. +These graphs represent the state of a system or a set of systems, and can be used to identify all +current or future ways the systems are compromised or at risk of violating regulatory or compliance mandates. +However, due to their exhaustiveness and thorough permutation checking, +these graphs suffer from state space explosion - the graphs rapidly increase in the total number of states, and likewise, +their generation time also rapidly increases. +This state space explosion in turn also slows the analysis process. +This work introduces a mitigation technique called synchronous firing, where graph users and designers +can prevent the generation of infeasible states by firing exploits simultaneously +through joining inseparable features like time. +This feature does not invalidate the integrity of the resulting attack or compliance graph by +altering the exhaustiveness or permutation checking of the generation process, +but rather jointly fires exploits through their defined inseparable features. +\end{abstract} + +\begin{IEEEkeywords} +Attack Graph; Compliance and Regulation; Compliance Graph; Cybersecurity; High-Performance Computing; Speedup; Synchronous Firing; +\end{IEEEkeywords} + +\maketitle + +\section{INTRODUCTION} + +\IEEEPARstart{C}{ybersecurity} has been at the forefront of computing for decades, and vulnerability analysis modeling has been utilized to mitigate threats to aid in this effort. One such modeling approach is to represent a system or a set of systems through graphical means, and encode information into the nodes and edges of the graph. Even as early as the late 1990s, experts have composed various graphical models to map devices and vulnerabilities through attack trees, and this work can be seen through the works published by the authors of \cite{phillips_graph-based_1998}. +This work, and other attack tree discussions of this time such as that conducted by the author of \cite{schneier_modeling_1999}, would later be referred to as early versions of modern-day attack graphs \cite{ou_scalable_2006}. +By utilizing this graphical approach, cybersecurity postures can be measured at a system's current status, as well as hypothesize and examine other postures based on system changes over time. Attack graphs have also been extended to Cyber-Physical Systems (CPS) and the Internet of Things (IoT), and their usage can be seen in works such as that presented by the authors of \cite{CPSIOT, ming_jo}. Various analysis metrics can then be performed, such as Bayesian attack graphs \cite{10.1145/3105760}, maximum flow \cite{8290918}, and centrality-based ranking measures \cite{centrality_based}. + +As an alternative to attack graphs for examining vulnerable states and measuring cybersecurity postures, the focus can be narrowed to generate graphs with the purpose of examining compliance or regulation statuses. These graphs are known as compliance graphs. +Compliance graphs can be especially useful for cyber-physical systems, where a greater need for compliance exists. As the authors of \cite{j_hale_compliance_nodate, baloyi_guidelines_2019, allman_complying_2006} discuss, cyber-physical systems have seen greater usage, especially in areas such as critical infrastructure and IoT. The challenge of +cyber-physical systems lies not only in the demand for cybersecurity of these systems, but also the concern for safe, stable, and undamaged equipment. +The industry in which these devices are used can lead to additional compliance guidelines that must be followed, increasing the complexity required for examining compliance statuses. Compliance graphs are promising tools that can aid in minimizing the overhead caused by these systems and the regulations they must follow. + +Attack graphs are an appealing approach since they are often designed to be exhaustive: all system properties are represented at its initial state, all attack options are fully enumerated, all permutations are examined, and all changes to a system are encoded into their own independent states, where these states are then individually analyzed through the process. The authors of \cite{sheyner_automated_2002} also discuss the advantage of conciseness of attack graphs, where the final graph only incorporates states that an attacker can leverage; no superfluous states are generated that can clutter analysis. +Despite their advantages, attack graphs do suffer from their exhaustiveness as well. As the authors of \cite{ou_scalable_2006} examine, even very small networks with only 10 hosts and 5 vulnerabilities yield graphs with 10 million edges. When scaling attack graphs to analyze the modern, interconnected state of large networks comprising of a multitude of hosts, and utilizing the entries located in the National Vulnerability Database and any custom vulnerability testing, attack graph generation quickly becomes infeasible. +Similar difficulties arise in related fields, where social networks, bioinformatics, and neural network representations result in graphs with millions of states \cite{zhang_boosting_2017}. +This state space explosion is a natural by-product of the graph generation process, and removing or avoiding it entirely undermines the overall goal of attack and compliance graphs. However, there are some scenarios in which the state space explosion can be mitigated when certain features are inseparable. This work discusses the application of synchronous exploit firing which mitigates state space explosion for applicable scenarios, and discusses the results of its use. + +\section{Related Work} \label{sec:sync-lit} +Multiple works have introduced various approaches for mitigating state space explosion. The authors of \cite{Monotonicity} propose that attack graphs encapsulate excessive information that lead to difficulties in scalability. They discuss the concept of monotonicity, where attackers do not need to backtrack. If a previous exploit was achieved, its preconditions and postconditions should not be revoked through another, future exploit firing. The authors of \cite{TVA} use monotonicity in their tool, TVA, along with various node and edge representations based on sets and dependency graphs that can likewise mitigate the state space explosion challenge. The authors of \cite{ou_scalable_2006} also take the approach of using alternate representations of the underlying graph structure through logical attack graphs. In this representation, each node only encompasses a portion of the network in a logical statement format, as opposed to encoding the entire system information at each node. This approach is able to limit the total number of nodes to O$(N^2$), with \textit{N} representing the total number of nodes in the system. + +A form of synchronous firing is discussed by the author of \cite{louthan_hybrid_2011}, where it is described as grouped exploits. The functionality discussed by the author is similar: firing an exploit should be performed on all possible assets simultaneously. This was also described as synchronizing multiple exploits. The methodology is similar to the one implemented in this work, but there are notable differences. +The first, is that the work performed by the author of \cite{louthan_hybrid_2011} utilizes global features with group features. Using the simultaneous exploit firing necessitated a separation of global and group features, and grouped exploits could not be performed on exploits that could be applicable to both sets. +A second difference is that there is no consistency checking in the work by the author of \cite{louthan_hybrid_2011}, which could lead to indeterminate behavior or race conditions unless additional effort was put into encoding exploits to use precondition guards. +A third difference is that the work of \cite{louthan_hybrid_2011} could still lead to a separation of features. The grouped exploit feature would attempt to fire all exploits on all applicable assets simultaneously, but if some assets were not ready or capable to fire, these assets would not proceed with the exploit firing but the applicable assets would. +The last difference is that the work by the author of \cite{louthan_hybrid_2011} was developed in Python, since that was the language of the generator of the tool at the time. This work relies on RAGE (The RAGE Attack Graph Engine) for the feature development and result collection \cite{cook_rage_2018}. RAGE is developed in C++ for performance enhancements, so the synchronous firing feature in this new work was likewise developed in C++. + +\section{Inseparable Features} \label{sec:inseparable} +One main appeal of attack graphs and compliance graphs are their exhaustiveness. The ability to generate all permutations of attack chains or to generate all possible ways a system can fall out of compliance is a valuable feature. The disadvantage of this approach is that the generation of the final graph increases in time, as does the analysis. +Another disadvantage is that this exhaustiveness can produce states that are not actually attainable or realistic, as briefly mentioned in Section \ref{sec:sync-lit}. When a system has assets that have inseparable features, the generation process forcibly separates features to examine all permutations, since the generation process only modifies one quality at a time. +One example of an inseparable feature is time. If two different assets are identical and no constraints dictate otherwise, the two assets should not, and realistically cannot, proceed through time at different rates. For example, if two cars were manufactured at the same moment, one of these cars cannot proceed multiple time steps into the future while the other remains at its current time step; each car must step through time at the same rate. +However, the generation of attack graphs and compliance graphs examines the possibilities that one car ages by one time step, while the other car does not, or vice versa. This results in an attack graph that can be seen in Fig. \ref{fig:non-sync_ex}, which is a partial attack graph showing the separation of the time feature. +All shaded states are considered unattainable, since all of these states comprise of assets that have advanced time at different rates. It is noticeable that not only are the unattainable states themselves a wasteful generation, but they also lead to the generation of even more unattainable states that will then also be explored. +A better procedure for a generation process similar to this example is to have a single state transition that updates assets with an inseparable feature simultaneously. + +\begin{figure}[htp] + \centering + \includegraphics[width=0.9\linewidth]{"./images/schri1.png"} + \caption{A network without Synchronous Firing generating infeasible states} + \label{fig:non-sync_ex} +\end{figure} + +Post-processing is one option at removing the unattainable states. This process would simplify and reduce the time taken for the analysis process, but the generation process would still suffer from generating and exploring the unattainable states, and would still need to go through a post-processing step. +Instead, a new feature called synchronous firing can be used to prevent the generation of these states. The goal of the synchronous firing feature is to prevent the generation of unattainable states, while incurring no greater computational cost. Section \ref{sec:implementing} will discuss the development of this feature, and Section \ref{sec:Results} will examine the results when using this feature in applicable networks. + +\section{Implementing Synchronous Firing} \label{sec:implementing} +For the implementation of the synchronous firing feature, there were four primary changes and additions that were necessary. The first is a change in the lexical analyzer, the second involves multiple changes to PostgreSQL, the third is the implementation of compound operators, and lastly is a change in the graph generation process. The subsections in this Section describe these four alterations. + +\subsection{GNU Bison and Flex} +The work conducted by the author of \cite{cook_rage_2018} included the introduction of GNU Bison and GNU Flex into RAGE. The introduction of Bison and Flex allows for an easily modifiable grammar to adjust features, the ability to easily update parsers since Bison and Flex are built into the build system, and increases portability since Flex and Bison generate standard C. +For the development of the synchronous firing feature, a similar approach was taken to that of the work performed by the author of \cite{louthan_hybrid_2011} with the exploit keywords. This work implements the ``group" keyword. +The new keyword is intended to be used when creating the exploit files. The design of exploits in the exploit file is developed as: +\begin{spverbatim} ::= "group" + "exploit" , + ()= \end{spverbatim} +\\ +\\ +where the ``$<$group name$>$" identifier and ``group" keyword is optional. An example of an exploit not utilizing the group feature is: +\begin{spverbatim}exploit + brake_pads(2015_Toyota_Corolla_LE)=\end{spverbatim} +\\ +\\ +and an example of an exploit utilizing the group feature is: +\begin{spverbatim}time group exploit + advance_month(all_applicable)=\end{spverbatim} +\\ +\\ +To implement the keyword recognition and group name parsing, a few changes were made, where the intention was to detect the usage of the ``group" keyword, and have the lexical analyzer code return to the parser implementation file to alert of the presence of the ``GROUP" token. +The new token is of type string with the name ``GROUP", and it is comprised of a leading ``IDENTIFIER" of type string or integer token, followed by the ``GROUP" token. +This new token also required changes to the processing of the ``exploit" keyword. If the group keyword is not detected, the exploit has a group of name ``null". If the group keyword is detected, then the leading IDENTIFIER is parsed, and the exploit is assigned to a group with the parsed name. Various auxiliary functions were also adjusted to include (for instance) support for printing the groups of each exploit. Fig. \ref{fig:bison-flex} illustrates the incorporation of this feature into Bison, Flex, and the overall program. + +\begin{figure}[htp] + \centering + \includegraphics[width=2.5in]{"./images/schri2.png"} + \caption{Inclusion of Synchronous Firing into GNU Bison, GNU Flex, and the overall program} + \label{fig:bison-flex} +\end{figure} + + +\subsection{PostgreSQL} +As seen in Fig. \ref{fig:bison-flex}, Bison and Flex feed into the Model Database. With the addition of a new group identifier and the group keyword, minor alterations were needed to ensure compatibility with the PostgreSQL database. +One adjustment was to alter the exploit table in the SQL schema to include new columns of type ``TEXT". The second adjustment was to update the SQL builder functions. This included updating the related functions such as exploit creations, exploit parsing, database fetching, and SQL string builders to add additional room for the group identifier. Additional care was taken to ensure that the normalization form of the database was not altered. Before adding the group identifier to its appropriate table, additional checking was performed to ensure there would be no partial functional dependencies or transitive dependencies. + +\subsection{Compound Operators} +Many of the graphs previously generated by RAGE comprise of states with features that can be fully enumerated. In many of these generated graphs, there was an established set of qualities that was used, with an established set of values. These typically have included $``compliance$\_$vio=true/false"$, $``root=true/false"$, or other general $``true/false"$ values or $``version=X"$ qualities. +To expand on the types and complexities of graphs that can be generated and to allow for synchronous firing, compound operators have been added to RAGE. When updating a state, rather than setting a quality to a specific value, the previous value can now be modified by an amount specified through standard compound operators such as $\mathrel{+}=$, $\mathrel{-}=$, $\mathrel{*}=$, or $\mathrel{/}=$. +Previous work on an attack graph generator included the implementation of compound operators, as seen by the author of \cite{nichols_2018}. However, this work was conducted on the previous iteration of an attack graph generator written in Python. This attack graph generator has since been rewritten in C++ by the author of \cite{cook_rage_2018}, and compound operators were not included in the latest version of RAGE. + +The work conducted by the author of \cite{cook_rage_2018} when designing the software architecture of RAGE included specifications for a quality encoding scheme. As they discuss, qualities have four fields, which include the asset ID, attributes, operator, and value. The operator field is 4 bits, which allows for a total of 16 operators. Since the only operator in use at the time was the $``\mathrel{=}"$ operator, the addition of four compound operators does not surpass the 16 operator limit, and no encoding scheme changes were necessary. This also allows for additional compound operators to be incorporated in the future. + +A few changes were necessary to allow for the addition of compound operators. Before the generation of an attack graph begins, all values are stored in a hash table. For previous networks generated by RAGE, this was not a concern since all values could be fully enumerated and all possible values were known. When using compound operators however, not all values can be fully known. The task of approximating which exploits will be applicable and what absolute minimum or maximum value bounds will be prior to generation is difficult, and not all values can be enumerated and stored into the hash table. As a result, real-time updates to the hash table needed to be added to the generator. +The original key-value scheme for hash tables relied on utilizing the size of the hash table for values. Since the order in which updates happen may not always remain consistent (and is especially true in distributed computing environments), it is possible for states to receive different hash values with the original hashing scheme. To prevent this, the hashing scheme was adjusted so that the new value of the compound operator is inserted into the hash table values if it was not found, rather than the size of the hash table. +Previously, there was no safety check for the hash table, so if the value was not found, the program would end execution. The assertion that the new value can be inserted into the hash table is safe to make, since compound operators are conducted on numeric values, and matches the numeric type of the hash table. + +Other changes involved updating classes (namely the Quality, EncodedQuality, ParameterizedQuality, NetworkState, and Keyvalue classes) to include a new member for the operator in question. In addition, preconditions were altered to include operator overloads to check the asset identifier, quality name, and quality values for the update process. + +\subsection{Graph Generation} +The implementation of synchronous firing in the graph generation process relies on a map to hold the fired status of groups. Previously, each iteration of the applicable exploit vector loop generated a new state. With synchronous firing, all assets should be updating the same state, rather than each independently creating a new state. To implement this, each iteration of the applicable exploit vector checks if the current loop element is in a group and if that group has fired. If the element is in a group, the group has not been fired, and all group members are ready to fire, then all group members will loop through an update process to alter the single converged state. Otherwise, the loop will either continue to the next iteration if group conditions are not met, or will create a single state if it is not in a group. Fig. \ref{fig:sync-fire} displays the synchronous fire approach. + +\begin{figure}[htp] + \centering + \includegraphics[scale=0.5,width=2.5in]{"./images/schri3.png"} + \caption{Synchronous Firing in the Graph Generation Process} + \label{fig:sync-fire} +\end{figure} + + + +\section{Results} \label{sec:Results} +\subsection{Experimental Networks and Computing Platform} \label{sec:test-platform} +All data was collected on a 13 node cluster, with 12 nodes serving as dedicated compute nodes, and 1 node serving as the login node. Each compute node has a configuration as follows: +\begin{itemize} + \item{OS: CentOS release 6.9} + \item{CPU: Two 8-core Intel Xeon E5-2620 v3} + \begin{itemize} + \item{With hyperthreading: 2 threads/process per core} + \end{itemize} + \item{Two Intel Xeon Phi Co-Processors} + \item{One FPGA (Nallatech PCIE-385n A7 Altera Stratix V)} + \item{Memory: 64318MiB} +\end{itemize} +All nodes are connected with a 10Gbps Infiniband interconnect. + +The example networks for testing the effectiveness of synchronous firing follow the compliance graph generation approach. These networks analyze two assets, both of which are identical 2006 Toyota Corolla cars with identical qualities. The generation examines both cars at their current states, and proceeds to advance in time by a pre-determined amount, up to a pre-determined limit. Each time increment updates each car by an identical amount of mileage. During the generation process, it is determined if a car is out of compliance either through mileage or time since its last maintenance in accordance with the Toyota Corolla Maintenance Schedule manual. + +In addition, the tests employ the use of ``services", where if a car is out of compliance, it will go through a correction process and reset the mileage and time since last service. Each test varies in the number of services used. The 1 Service case only employs one service, and it is dedicated to brake pads. The 2-Service case employs two services, where the first service is dedicated to the brake pads, and the second is for exhaust pipes. This process extends to the 3-, 4-, 5-, and 6-Service cases. +The experimental setup is as follows: +\begin{itemize} + \item{All cases ran for 12 months, with time steps of 1 month.} + \item{All cases had the same number of compliance checks: brake pads, exhaust pipes, vacuum pumps, AC filters, oil changes, and driveshaft boots.} + \item{There were 12 base exploits, and an additional 6 exploits were individually added in the form of services for each test.} + \item{All cases used the same network model.} + \item{All cases used the same exploit file, with the exception of the ``group" keyword being present in the synchronous firing testing.} + \item{All services must be performed prior to advancing time, if services are applicable.} + \item{Graph visualization was not timed. Only the generation and database operation time was measured.} +\end{itemize} + +The compliance checks are as follows: +\begin{itemize} + \item{Brake pads: to be checked every 6 months} + \item{Exhaust pipes: to be checked every 12 months} + \item{AC filter: to be checked every 12,000 miles} + \item{Vacuum pump: to be checked every 120,000 miles} + \item{Engine oil: to be checked every 6,000 miles} + \item{Driveshaft boots: to be checked every 12,000 miles} +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Results and Analysis} +\subsubsection{Results for the Theoretical Environment} \label{sec:theo_res} +Using the experimental setup described in Section \ref{sec:test-platform} on the platform described at the beginning of Section \ref{sec:test-platform}, results were collected in regards to the effect of synchronous firing on both state space and runtime. The graphs' edge to state ratio (E/S Ratio) was computed as well. These results can be seen in Figures \ref{fig:Sync-RT} and \ref{fig:Sync-State}. The respective tables are seen in Tables \ref{table:NS-Table} and \ref{table:S-Table}. Both figures show a decrease in the number of states and a decrease in the runtime when synchronous firing is utilized. Since synchronous firing prevents the generation of unattainable states, there is no meaningful information loss that occurs in the graphs generated with the synchronous firing feature. Since the resulting number of states was also reduced, there will be increased justification for the synchronous firing approach due to a reduced runtime for the analysis process. Fig. \ref{fig:Sync-Spd} displays the speedup (according to Amdahl's Law) obtained when using synchronous firing instead of non-synchronous firing for identical setups. + +When examining the E/S Ratio for the non-synchronous graphs, it is both expected and observed that the ratio slightly increases as the number of services increases. When more applicable exploits are used during the generation process, the number of permutations increases, which corresponds with the growing number of states and edges. However, the increase in the number of services also increases the relation between states and the new permutations. + +When comparing the E/S Ratio for the non-synchronous graphs to the E/S Ratio for the synchronous graphs, it is observed that the ratio does not remain constant. For example, for the 5-Service case, the non-synchronous graph has an E/S Ratio of 6.398, and the synchronous graph has an E/S Ratio of 7.209. While the number of states and the number of edges is reduced when using synchronous firing, the ratio of edges to states is not necessarily constant or reduced. + +\begin{figure} + \centering + \includegraphics[width=3.3in]{"./images/schri4.png"} + \includegraphics[width=3.3in]{"./images/schri5.png"} + \caption[Synchronous Firing on Runtime]{Bar Graph and Line Graph Representations of Synchronous Firing on Runtime} + \label{fig:Sync-RT} +\end{figure} + +\begin{figure} + \centering + \includegraphics[width=3.3in]{"./images/schri6.png"} + \includegraphics[width=3.3in]{"./images/schri7.png"} + \caption{Bar Graph and Line Graph Representations of Synchronous Firing on State Space} + \label{fig:Sync-State} +\end{figure} + +\begin{figure}[htp] + \centering + \includegraphics[width=3.3in]{"./images/schri8.png"} + \caption{Speedup (Amdahl's) Obtained When Using Synchronous Firing} + \label{fig:Sync-Spd} +\end{figure} + +\begin{table}[htp] + \caption{Results for the Non-Synchronous Firing Testing} + \label{table:NS-Table} + \centering + \setlength\tabcolsep{4pt} + \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|} + \hline + \multicolumn{5}{|c|}{Non-Synchronous Firing} \\ \hline + \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Number of \\ Services\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Number of \\ States\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Number of \\ Edges\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Runtime\\ (ms)\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}E/S\\ Ratio\end{tabular}} + \\ \hline + 1 & 37001 & 202920 & 87366.65 & 5.484 \\ \hline + 2 & 46361 & 259400 & 115929.97 & 5.595 \\ \hline + 3 & 72489 & 405236 & 184634.34 & 5.590 \\ \hline + 4 & 93525 & 546280 & 252959.511 & 5.841 \\ \hline + 5 & 209944 & 1254784 & 588336.01 & 5.977 \\ \hline + 6 & 423940 & 2712165 & 1581697.61 & 6.398 \\ \hline + \end{tabular} +\end{table} + +\begin{table}[htp] + \caption{Results for the Synchronous Firing Testing} + \label{table:S-Table} + \centering + \setlength\tabcolsep{4pt} + \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c|} + \hline + \multicolumn{6}{|c|}{Synchronous Firing} \\ \hline + \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Services\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}States\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Edges\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Runtime\\(ms)\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}E/S\\Ratio\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Speedup\end{tabular}} + \\ \hline + 1 & 6277 & 3.46E04 & 1.48E04 & 5.507 & 5.87 \\ \hline + 2 & 11653 & 6.94E04 & 2.92E04 & 5.954 & 3.96 \\ \hline + 3 & 25317 & 1.60E05 & 6.68E04 & 6.321 & 2.76 \\ \hline + 4 & 36949 & 2.42E05 & 1.02E05 & 6.538 & 2.47 \\ \hline + 5 & 83134 & 5.71E05 & 2.44E05 & 6.868 & 2.42 \\ \hline + 6 & 186679 & 1.35E06 & 5.82E05 & 7.209 & 2.72 \\ \hline + \end{tabular} +\end{table} + +\subsubsection{Results for a Grouped Environment} +The environment and resulting graphs presented in Section \ref{sec:theo_res} depict the possible states of the two cars in compliance graph formats. While these graphs demonstrated accurate, exhaustive depictions of the cars and their compliance standings, they may not be realistic representations of the most likely outcomes. If a car was due for two compliance checks at the same time, it is unlikely that the car would be taken for one maintenance, returned to its original destination, then driven immediately back for maintenance, and finally to its original destination once more. The more realistic scenario is that the car is taken for maintenance, both services are performed at the same visit, and then the car is returned to its original destination. + +Another set of graphs were generated using only the 3-Service case. These services were for a driveshaft boot check, an AC filter change, and an oil change. This set of graphs used `comprehensive services", where a car would undergo multiple services simultaneously. With three services used, there are a total of three permutations: all three services are done individually, two services are performed simultaneously while the other is performed later, and all three services are performed simultaneously. + +For this set of examples, all compliance checks have the same time requirements. This work does not introduce any heuristics or methodologies for intentionally performing services early or late. If Service A was required no later than every 6 months, but Service B was required no later than every 8 months, then joining Service A and Service B together would either mean: 1. Service B was completed 2 months earlier than it needed to be, or 2. Service A was completed 2 months later than it needed to be. This was considered out of scope for this approach, but this is noted in the Future Works Section (Section \ref{sec:fw}). + +These results are seen in Table \ref{table:Sync-Comp-Table} for the synchronous firing enabled generation, and Table \ref{table:Non-Sync-Comp-Table} for the non-synchronous firing generation. The corresponding figures for the runtime can be seen in Fig. \ref{fig:Comp-Sync-RT}, and the corresponding figures for state space can be seen in Fig. \ref{fig:Comp-Sync-State}. It is noticeable that there is a state space reduction achieved through synchronous firing in this set of examples, along with a runtime improvement. When all three services were conjoined, synchronous firing provided a 5.09x speedup over non-synchronous firing. Using comprehensive services on their own also provided a reduction in state space and an improvement in runtime. When synchronous firing was enabled and comprehensive services were used, the total number of states could be reduced from 25,317 to 3,774, providing a a 6.7x reduction in state space solely from combining services. + +Leveraging comprehensive services with synchronous firing enables users to significantly reduce the size of the resulting attack or compliance graphs. Comprehensive services also enable users to introduce heuristics to analyze and identify optimal service plans for compliance, or attack mitigation strategies for attack graphs. Coupled with synchronous firing, analysis of these optimal plans can be performed quicker due to the inexistence of superfluous, unattainable states. + +\begin{table}[htp] + \caption{Results for the Comprehensive Services without Synchronous Firing} + \label{table:Non-Sync-Comp-Table} + \centering + \setlength\tabcolsep{4pt} + \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|} + \hline + \multicolumn{5}{|c|}{Comprehensive Services with Non-Synchronous Firing} \\ \hline + \textbf{Permutation} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}States\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Edges\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Runtime\\(ms)\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}E/S\\Ratio\end{tabular}} + \\ \hline + \begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}All \\ Disjoint\end{tabular} + & 72489 & 405236 & 184634.34 & 5.590 \\ \hline + \begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Any Two\\Services,\\One Disjoint\end{tabular} + & 50052 & 241176 & 125176.22 & 4.819 \\ \hline + \begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}All \\ Conjoined\end{tabular} + & 19764 & 87024 & 47126.42 & 4.403 \\ \hline + \end{tabular} +\end{table} + +\begin{table}[htp] + \caption{Results for the Comprehensive Services with Synchronous Firing} + \label{table:Sync-Comp-Table} + \centering + \setlength\tabcolsep{4pt} + \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c|} + \hline + \multicolumn{6}{|c|}{Comprehensive Services with Synchronous Firing} \\ \hline + \textbf{Permutation} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}States\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Edges\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Runtime\\ (ms)\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}E/S\\ Ratio\end{tabular}} + & \textbf{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Speedup\end{tabular}} + \\ \hline + \begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}All \\ Disjoint\end{tabular} + & 25317 & 160041 & 66799.18 & 6.321 & 2.76 \\ \hline + \begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}Any Two\\Services,\\One Disjoint\end{tabular} + & 10398 & 55354 & 26042.85 & 5.324 & 4.81 \\ \hline + \begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}All \\ Conjoined\end{tabular} + & 3774 & 18370 & 9261.03 & 4.868 & 5.09 \\ \hline + \end{tabular} +\end{table} + +\begin{figure} + \centering + \includegraphics[width=3.3in]{"./images/schri9.png"} + \includegraphics[width=3.3in]{"./images/schri10.png"} + \caption[Synchronous Firing on Runtime]{Bar Graph and Line Graph Representations of Synchronous Firing with Comprehensive Services on Runtime} + \label{fig:Comp-Sync-RT} +\end{figure} + +\begin{figure} + \centering + \includegraphics[width=3.3in]{"./images/schri11.png"} + \includegraphics[width=3.3in]{"./images/schri12.png"} + \caption{Bar Graph and Line Graph Representations of Synchronous Firing with Comprehensive Services on State Space} + \label{fig:Comp-Sync-State} +\end{figure} + +\begin{figure}[htp] + \centering + \includegraphics[width=3.3in]{"./images/schri13.png"} + \caption{Speedup (Amdahl's) Obtained When Using Synchronous Firing with Comprehensive Services} + \label{fig:Comp-Sync-Spd} +\end{figure} + + +\section{Future Works} \label{sec:fw} +As seen and discussed in Section \ref{sec:inseparable}, when unattainable states are generated, there is a compounding effect. Each unattainable state is explored, and is likely to generate additional unattainable states. Future works include examining the effect of synchronous firing when more assets are utilized. It is hypothesized that the synchronous firing approach will lead to an increased runtime reduction and state space reduction due to the increased number of unattainable state permutations. This work had a limited number of assets, but generated upwards of 400,000 states due to repeated applications of the exploit set due to the services corresponding with the compliance graph. Future work could alter the scenario to have a greater number of assets, and a standard set of exploits more akin to an attack graph rather than a compliance graph. Other future works could include measuring the performance of synchronous firing when multiple groups of inseparable features are used. This work used a single group, but multiple groups be added to examine the performance of the feature. + +Another avenue for future work would be to take a network science approach. There may be features of interest from examining the topology of the resulting graphs with and without synchronous firing. Various centrality metrics could be examined, as well as examining transformations such as dominant trees or transitive closures derived from the original graphs. Each approach could compare each graph when using or not using synchronous firing to determine if there are possible points of interest. Taking a network science approach could also examine and analyze the E/S Ratio of the graphs when using or not using synchronous firing, and attempt to provide further insight on what those differences mean in terms of usability of the graphs. + +Introducing service heuristics could improve the characteristics of synchronous firing. If services are performed too early, then additional states would be generated in the resulting graph. If synchronous firing was not used, these additional states could compound into more states due to the separation of features. Likewise, if services are performed too late, then additional states could be generated to represent the compliance violation, and these states may also compound into more statues without synchronous firing. Examining the impact of synchronous firing when various heuristics are implemented could reveal interesting results. + +\section{Conclusion} +This work implemented a state space explosion mitigation technique called synchronous firing. This feature is able to fire exploits simultaneously among a group of assets through a single state transition. By firing exploits across multiple assets, it is able to prevent the separation of features that should normally be inseparable (such as time), and successfully reduces the number of total states in the resulting attack or compliance graph. This feature does not alter the procedure of the generation process in a way that undermines the integrity of the resulting attack or compliance graph, and only groups assets through defined inseparable features. This feature is also toggleable, and the generation process seen in Fig. \ref{fig:sync-fire} does not change if the feature is disabled. This feature successfully reduced the total number of states, reduced the runtime of the generation process, and can lead to a reduced analysis process due to a smaller resulting graph. + +\bibliography{Bibliography} +\bibliographystyle{ieeetr} + +\end{document} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template.zip b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template.zip new file mode 100644 index 0000000..49ad53a Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template.zip differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/a1.png b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/a1.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6dfbe0c Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/a1.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/a2.png b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/a2.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..74fb64c Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/a2.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/a3.png b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/a3.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d90360e Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/a3.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/fig1.png b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/fig1.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba01aa5 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/fig1.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ieeeoj.cls b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ieeeoj.cls new file mode 100644 index 0000000..057c23c --- /dev/null +++ b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ieeeoj.cls @@ -0,0 +1,5018 @@ +% ===================================================================== +%% IEEEoj.cls 2020/06/19 version V1.0 +%% +%% IEEE Open Journals document class file for LaTeX2e +%% +%% Copyright (C) IEEE Open Journals +%% for LaTeX version 1.0, by Aptara, India +%% +%% IEEEoj.cls is based on IEEEtran.cls version V1.7a. +%% +%% IEEEoj.cls is created to match the design layout of +%% IEEE OJ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Open Journals Acronym %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% %% +%% OJCS IEEE Open Journal of the Computer Society %% +%% %% +%% OJEMB IEEE Open Journal of the Engineering in Medicine and Biology %% +%% %% +%% OJIA IEEE Open Journal of the Industry Applications %% +%% %% +%% OJIES IEEE Open Journal of the Industrial Electronics Society %% +%% %% +%% OJNANO IEEE Open Journal of the Nanotechnology %% +%% %% +%% OJPEL IEEE Open Journal of the Power Electronics %% +%% %% +%% OJSP IEEE Open Journal of the Signal Processing %% +%% %% +%% OJVT IEEE Open Journal of the Vehicular Technology %% +%% %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% +%% ===================================================================== +%% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a +%% +%% +%% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of +%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and +%% conferences. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ +%% +%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes +%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version. +%% +%% +%% Contributors: +%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), +%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), +%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007) +%% +%% +%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, +%% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter, +%% Juergen von Hagen +%% and +%% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell +%% +%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell +%% See: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau +%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command +%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. +%% +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%% +%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex +%% +%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an +%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will +%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA. +%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version +%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls". +%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user, +%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the +%% correct version information. +%% The changes should also be documented via source comments. +%%************************************************************************* +%% +% +% Available class options +% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} +% +% *** choose only one from each category *** +% +% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt +% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt. +% +% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca +% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers, +% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user +% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like +% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for +% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is +% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review +% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will +% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the +% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are +% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like +% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted +% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact +% information can be easily seen on the cover page. +% The default is journal. +% +% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final +% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for +% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version. +% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX +% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows +% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like +% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot +% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably +% also want to select onecolumn. +% The default is final. +% +% letterpaper, a4paper +% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER +% SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS +% WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will +% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer +% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top +% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. +% For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in) +% paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing +% (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document. +% Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins. +% IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex +% (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more +% important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for +% dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the +% testflow documentation +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow +% for more details on dvips paper size configuration. +% The default is letterpaper. +% +% oneside, twoside +% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex) +% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of +% the pages. +% The default is oneside. +% +% onecolumn, twocolumn +% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One +% column mode is usually used only with draft papers. +% The default is twocolumn. +% +% compsoc +% Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society. +% +% romanappendices +% Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls +% now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what +% v1.6b and earlier did. +% +% captionsoff +% disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals +% request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages +% of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat +% package can be used with this class option to achieve this format. +% +% nofonttune +% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those +% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned" +% their fonts. +% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters. +% +% +%---------- +% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted): +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch +% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin +% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin +% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin +% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin +% +% Available CLASSINFOs provided: +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional) +% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro) +% \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro) +% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length) +% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length) +% +% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided: +% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted, +% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +% point size options provided as a single macro: +% \CLASSOPTIONpt +% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's +% normalsize point size. +% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview +% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls + + + + + +\ProvidesClass{IEEEphot}[2009/06/23 V1.2] +\typeout{-- See the "IEEEphot_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + +% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3 +% These values serve as a way a .tex file can +% determine if the new features are provided. +% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from +% these values. i.e., V1.4 +% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that- +% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here) +\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} +\def\IEEEtransversionminor{7} + +% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls +\newif\if@restonecol +\newif\if@titlepage + + +% class option conditionals +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue%false +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue + +\global\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue +\global\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse + + +% class info conditionals + +% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output +\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse + + +% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper +\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse + + + +% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers +% dimen +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +% count +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB +% token list +\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA + +% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs) +% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some +% external packages +\def\@ptsize{0} +% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt +\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}} +\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}} +\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}} +\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}} +% +\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% + \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% + \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{IEEE Photonics PaperSize}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.25in}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{10.75in}} +% +\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% + \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% + \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}} + +\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse + \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse} +\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue + \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse} + +\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse} +\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse} + +% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages +% will go into draft mode. +\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} +% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages +% used by the document. +\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} +% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer. +\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} +\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} + +\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue} + +\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue} + +\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue} + +\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue} + +\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue} + + +% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal +%% \ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal} +\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,twoside,final,journal} +% overrride these defaults per user requests +\ProcessOptions + + + +% Computer Society conditional execution command +\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} +% inverse +\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} +% compsoc conference +\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} +% compsoc not conference +\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} + + +% IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times. +% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package. +\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} +\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} +\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} + +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}} + +% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font, +% not Times Roman. +\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{phvr}} + +% enable Times/Palatino main text font +\normalfont\selectfont + + + + + +% V1.7 conference notice message hook +\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}% +\typeout{** Conference Paper **}% +\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}% +\typeout{}% +\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}% +\typeout{ of your paper;}% +\typeout{}% +\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}% +\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}% +\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}% +\typeout{}} + + +% we can send console reminder messages to the user here +\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi} + + +% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode +%\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else% +% \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else% +% \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}% +% \fi% +%\fi + + +% V1.7 improved paper size setting code. +% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that +% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered, +% even if only effect is to set them to \relax. +% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special +{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{% +% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax +% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput +% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput. +\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth +\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}% +% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special +\ifcase\pdfoutput +\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}% +\else +% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag +\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue +\fi}} + +% let the user know the selected papersize +\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space +(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.} + +\ifCLASSINFOpdf +\typeout{-- Using PDF output.} +\else +\typeout{-- Using DVI output.} +\fi + + +% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{} +% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{}, +% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc. +% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as +% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues +% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}. +% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion. +%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}} +%\def\@journal{} + + + +% pointsize values +% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size +\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9} +\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10} +\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11} +\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12} + + + +% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) +% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and +% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems +% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want +% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading) +% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down) +% 10pt 58 12pt (exact) +% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down) +% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact) +% + +% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size +% in case baselinestretch ever changes. +% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink +\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip + +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine +\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1ex plus3pt minus1pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 1ex plus3pt minus1pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8}{10pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{18}{20pt}} +\fi + + +% Check if we have selected 10 points +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten +\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{12bp}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 5pt plus4pt minus2pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 5pt plus4pt minus2pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8}{12pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{12pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} +% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}\bfseries}%%%% Author Font +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{18}{20pt}}%%%%title font +\fi + + +% Check if we have selected 11 points +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven +\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} +\fi + + +% Check if we have selected 12 points +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve +\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} +\fi + + +% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for +% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution +% tolerance to turn off this warning +\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt} +% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed. + + +% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with +% technote +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else% + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}% + \fi% +\fi + + +% V1.7 +% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with +% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use +% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. +\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family +\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family +\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family +\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family +\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family +\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else +\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax} + + + + +% set the default \baselinestretch +\def\baselinestretch{1} +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes +\fi + + +% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch +\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined +\else + \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to + \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} +\fi + +\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect + + + + +% store the normalsize baselineskip +\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip +\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax +% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip +% we could save a register by giving the user access to +% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect +% its read only internal status +\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax +% store the nominal value of jot +\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot +\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax + +% set \jot +\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax + + + + +% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing +% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a +% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em) +% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%. +% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of: +% +% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt +% +% However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need +% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE +% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words. +% IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be: +% 35% nominal +% 23% minimum +% 50% maximum +% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.) +% +% for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more: +% 37.5% nominal +% 23% minimum +% 55% maximum + +% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use +% for medium (normal weight) +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50} + +% for bold +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} + + +% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: +% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space +% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch +% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink +% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands +% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes +\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{% +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead. +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}} + +% revise the interword spacing for each font weight +\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% +\mdseries +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}% +\bfseries +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}% +}} + +% revise the interword spacing for each font shape +% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are +% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we +% won't alter these either. +\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% +\normalfont +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens +\normalfont\itshape +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens +}} + +% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape +% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a +% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers. +\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily +\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}} + +% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing +% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make +% sure all the default fonts are loaded +\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else +\@IEEEtunefonts +\fi + +% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts +\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi} + + + +% V1.6 +% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations +% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise +% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox +% warning. The author may still have to tweak things, +% but the appearance will be much better "right out +% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. +% TeX default is 50 +\hyphenpenalty=750 +% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. +% The TeX default is 1000 +\hbadness=1350 +% IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation +\frenchspacing + +% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks +\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700 +\relpenalty=800 % default 500 + + +% margin note stuff +\marginparsep 10pt +\marginparwidth 20pt +\marginparpush 25pt + + +% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch +\lineskip 0pt +\normallineskip 0pt +\lineskiplimit 0pt +\normallineskiplimit 0pt + +% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the +% footline +\footskip 42pt%%%0.4in%24pt%in + +% normally zero, should be relative to font height. +% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes) +\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex + +\parindent 10pt + +\topmargin 5pc%-49.0pt +\headheight 12pt +\headsep 0.25in + +% use the normal font baselineskip +% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch +\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\textheight 59pc % 9.63in, 696pt +% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. +% The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used +% to determine these values. +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=57\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page + + +\columnsep 12pt +\textwidth 42pc % 2 x 19pc + 2pc = 40pc + + +% the default side margins are equal +\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper +\oddsidemargin 5pc +\evensidemargin 5pc +\else +\oddsidemargin 0.680in +\evensidemargin 0.680in +\fi +% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset +\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} +\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} + + + +% adjust margins for conference mode +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference + \topmargin -0.25in + % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} + \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt) + % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=57\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 56 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page +\fi + + +% compsoc conference +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference + % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep + \columnsep 0.375in + % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin + \topmargin 0in + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff + % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} + \textheight 8.875in % (641.39625pt) + % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 53 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page + \textwidth 6.5in + % the default side margins are equal + \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper + \oddsidemargin 22.45mm + \evensidemargin 22.45mm + \else + \oddsidemargin 1in + \evensidemargin 1in + \fi + % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset + \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} + \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} +\fi\fi + + + +% draft mode settings override that of all other modes +% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra +% space between the lines for editor's comments +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + % want 1in from top of paper to text + \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}% + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}% + % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type + \oddsidemargin 0in + \evensidemargin 0in + % set the text width + \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}% + \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}% +%% \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}% + \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}% + % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines. + % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad + \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}% + \divide\textheight by \baselineskip% + \multiply\textheight by \baselineskip% + \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}% +\fi + + + +% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin +% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner. +\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} + \fi +\fi + +\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer. + \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} + \fi + \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} + \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside + \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} + \else + \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} + \fi + \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} + \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} + \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth} + \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} + \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and + outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} +\fi + + + +% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin +% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin +\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} + \fi +\fi + +\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin + \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} + \fi + \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in} + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} +%% \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight} + \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} + \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} + % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip + % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need + % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will + % correct for both. + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and + bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} +\fi + + + + + + + +% LIST SPACING CONTROLS + +% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing +% above and below \trivlist +% Both \list and IED lists override this. +% However, \trivlist will use this as will most +% things built from \trivlist like the \center +% environment. +\topsep 0.5\baselineskip + +% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded +% or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase +% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero. +% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster. +\partopsep \z@ + +% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. +% IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs +% so this is also zero. +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to +% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists). +\parsep \z@ + +% Controls the extra spacing between list items. +% IEEE does not put extra spacing between items. +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect +% lists (but not IED lists). +\itemsep \z@ + +% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list +% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter +% it, you have to do so when you call the \list. +% However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment +% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below +\itemindent -1em + +% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to +% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list. +% Hence this statement does nothing for lists. +% But, quote and verse do use it for indention. +\leftmargin 2em + +% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list +% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and +% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they +% all are overridden. +\leftmargini 2em +%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used. +%\leftmargini 0em +\leftmarginii 1em +\leftmarginiii 1.5em +\leftmarginiv 1.5em +\leftmarginv 1.0em +\leftmarginvi 1.0em +\labelsep .5em +\labelwidth \z@ + + +% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained. +% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the +% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the +% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). +% \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around +% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list. +% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in +% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes +% of these values DO affect \list +% +\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} +\let\@listI\@listi +\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} + + +% IEEE uses 5) not 5. +\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} + +% IEEE uses a) not (a) +\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} + +% IEEE uses iii) not iii. +\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} + +% IEEE uses A) not A. +\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} + +% exactly the same as in article.cls +\def\p@enumii{\theenumi} +\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} +\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} + +% itemized list label styles +\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$} +\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}} +\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$} +\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$} + + + +% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS **** +% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls +% *************************** +% +% +% IEEE seems to use at least two different values by +% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right +% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal +% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use +% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications +% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. +% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose +% which one you like in your document using a command such as: +% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA +\IEEEilabelindentA 0pt%\parindent + +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB +\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent +% However, we'll default to using \parindent +% which makes more sense to me +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent +\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA + + +% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels +% are indented to the right. +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention +\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent +\IEEEelabelindent \parindent + +% This controls the default amount the description list labels +% are indented to the right. +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention +\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent +\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent + +% This is the value actually used within the IED lists. +% The IED environments automatically set its value to +% one of the three values above, so global changes do +% not have any effect +\newdimen\IEEElabelindent +\IEEElabelindent \parindent + +% The actual amount labels will be indented is +% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below +% corresponding to the level of nesting depth +% This provides a means by which the user can +% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper +% levels +% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" +% values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific +% circumstances. +% The first list level almost always has full indention. +% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation +% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing +% that they don't use any indentation. +\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} + +% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto +% set to one of the 6 values above +% global changes here have no effect +\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0} + +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED +% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for +% the labels. +\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep +\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em + +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED +% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for +% the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the +% spacing in these cases +\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep +\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em + +% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and +% below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing +% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. +\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep +\IEEEiedtopsep 6pt plus 1pt minus 1pt + + +% This command is executed within each IED list environment +% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the +% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing +% global parameters that affect things other than lists. +% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} +% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until +% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. +\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax} + +% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based +% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent +% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} +% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: +% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} + +% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the +% width of the given text. It is the same as +% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} +% and useful as a shorter alternative. +% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width +% of the longest label in the list +\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} + +% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the +% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal +% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via +% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list +% environments. +\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} + +% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically +% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep +% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin +% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) +% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list +% environments to have an effect. +\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin +\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse + +% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by +% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level. +% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option +% of the IED list environments to have an effect. +\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor +\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse + + +% internal variable to indicate type of IED label +% justification +% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right +\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0} + + +% commands to allow the user to control IED +% label justifications. Use these commands within +% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl +% Note that changing the normal list justifications +% is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so! +% I include these commands as they may be helpful to +% those who are using these enhanced list controls for +% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. +% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right +% justification, description defaults to left. +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right + + + + +% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies +% this allows us to set all the list parameters within +% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) +% from overriding any of our parameters +% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% +\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% +\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% +\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} + +% Note controlled spacing here +\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% +\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% +\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% +\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% +\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% +\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% +\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% +\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% +\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% +\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} + + +% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments +% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description +% which must be created by the base classes +% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate +\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize +\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize +\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate +\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate + +% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls +\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription} + {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin + \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} + {\endlist} +\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep + \normalfont\bfseries #1} + + +% override LaTeX's default IED lists +\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} +\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} +\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} +\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} +\def\description{\@IEEEdescription} +\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} + +% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that +% override itemize, enumerate, or description +\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} +\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} +\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} +\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} +\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} +\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} + + +% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal +% commands so they are protected against redefinition +\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} +\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} +\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} +\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% + \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + \advance\@itemdepth\@ne% + \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \IEEElabelindent10pt%\IEEEilabelindent% + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % calculate the label width + % the user can override this later if + % they specified a \labelwidth + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% + \fi}\fi\fi}% + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% + \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + \advance\@enumdepth\@ne% + \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent% + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % calculate the label width + % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using + % normalfont 1) to 9) + % The user can override this later + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% + \fi}\fi\fi}% + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% + % assume normal labelsep + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % Bogus label width in case the user forgets + % to set it. + % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you + % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to + % display it on the screen during compilation + % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out + % which label is the widest) + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax% + \fi}\fi} + +% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. +\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax +\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else +\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax +\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else +\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} + + +% VERSE and QUOTE +% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment +\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax} + {\endlist} +\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax} + {\endlist} +\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax} + {\endlist} + + +% \titlepage +% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct +% way to create the title page. +\newif\if@restonecol +\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} +\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} + +% standard values from article.cls +\arraycolsep 5pt +\arrayrulewidth .4pt +\doublerulesep 2pt + +\tabcolsep 6pt +\tabbingsep 0.5em + + +%% FOOTNOTES +% +%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt +% V1.6 respond to changes in font size +% space added above the footnotes (if present) +\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip + +% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes +% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in +% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep +% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed +% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since +% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip +% above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to +% use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing +% between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad +% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps +% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran +% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle. +{\footnotesize +\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip} + + +\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins +\fboxsep = 8pt +\fboxrule = .4pt +% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark +% Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need +% box resizing tricks here. +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 10pt\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em +% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }} +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 10pt\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1} +\fi + +% IEEE does not use footnote rules +\def\footnoterule{} + +% V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot" +% system to implement this. +\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule +\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule +\kern-5pt +\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} +\kern4.6pt +\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse +\else +\relax +\fi} +\fi + +% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages +\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 + +% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations +% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000, +% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100. +\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 + +% default allows section depth up to /paragraph +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} + +% technotes do not allow /paragraph +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} +\fi +% neither do compsoc conferences +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}} + + +\newcounter{section} +\newcounter{subsection}[section] +\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] +\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection] + +% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may +% have their own, different, implementations +\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] + +% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents +\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1 +\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% compsoc is all arabic +\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} +\def\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}} +\def\thesubsubsection{\arabic{subsubsection})} +\def\theparagraph{\arabic{paragraph}} +\else +\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I +% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - +\def\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}} % I-A +% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1 +\def\thesubsubsection{\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1 +\def\theparagraph{\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a +\fi + +% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to +% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks. +% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but +% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions. +\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}% +\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax} + + +% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings) +% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes +% in the former to automatically appear in the latter +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} + \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.} + \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}:} + \else% compsoc not conferencs + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection} + \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}} + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection}} + \def\theparagraphdis{\arabic{paragraph}:} + \fi +\else% not compsoc%%%%%%% section numbering + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I. + \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B. + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3) + \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph}:} % d) +\fi + +% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum +\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) +% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray +\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) +% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on +% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis +\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis} + + + +% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does +\def\contentsname{Contents} +\def\listfigurename{List of Figures} +\def\listtablename{List of Tables} +\def\refname{REFERENCES} +\def\indexname{Index} +\def\figurename{FIGURE} +\def\tablename{TABLE} +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{FIGURE}\def\tablename{TABLE}} +\def\partname{Part} +\def\appendixname{Appendix} +\def\abstractname{Abstract} +% IEEE specific names +\def\IEEEkeywordsname{INDEX TERMS} +\def\IEEEproofname{Proof} + + +% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS +% +\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} +\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em} +\def\@dotsep{4.5} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} + +% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily +% collide with the section titles. +% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders. +% MDS 1/2001 +\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}} +\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}% + \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth% + \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par% + \endgroup} +% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep +\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}} +\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}} +% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth +% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents +% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are! +\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}} +\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}} +\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}} +\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}} +\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}} +\let\l@table\l@figure + + +%% Definitions for floats +%% +%% Normal Floats +\floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip +\textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip +\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil +\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil +\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil +\def\topfraction{0.9} +\def\bottomfraction{0.4} +\def\floatpagefraction{0.8} +% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page +\def\textfraction{0.1} + +%% Double Column Floats +\dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip + +\dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip +% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e. +% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best +% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable +% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and +% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with +% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex +% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998. +% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't +% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing. + +\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil +\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil +\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil +\def\dbltopfraction{0.8} +\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8} +\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4} + +\intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip +\setcounter{topnumber}{2} +\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} +\setcounter{totalnumber}{4} + + + +% article class provides these, we should too. +\newlength\abovecaptionskip +\newlength\belowcaptionskip +% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table +% captions +\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.25\baselineskip} +\setlength\belowcaptionskip{7.5pt} +% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be +% overridden by a user +\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% +\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\belowcaptionskip\relax}% + + +% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments +% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref. +\def\@IEEEtablestring{table} + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% +% test if is a for a figure or table +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% +% if a table, do table caption +\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}% +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace +% if not a table, format it as a figure +\else +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% +% if caption is shorter than a line, center +\else% +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\fi\fi} +\else% nonconference compsoc +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% +% test if is a for a figure or table +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% +% if a table, do table caption +\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}% +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace +% if not a table, format it as a figure +\else +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% +% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify +\else% +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\fi\fi} +\fi + +\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% +% test if is a for a figure or table +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% +% if a table, do table caption +\textcolor{ojcolor}{\tablecapnumfont#1.}\space{\tablecapfont #2}% +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace +% if not a table, format it as a figure +\else +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace +% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\enspace#2}% TB FIG +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around +\vspace*{2pt}% +{\textcolor{ojcolor}{\figcapnumfont#1.}\space{\figcapfont#2\par}}%TB FIG +% +% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise +\fi} +\fi + + + +% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label +% within \caption +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}% +\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label +\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax +\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}% +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}% +\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave +\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi} +\fi + + +% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with +% preview-latex +\newcounter{figure} +\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} +\def\fps@figure{tbp} +\def\ftype@figure{1} +\def\ext@figure{lof} +\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure} +\def\figure{\@float{figure}} +\def\endfigure{\end@float} +%% +\newbox\marginfigbox +\def\marginfigure{\@float{figure}\global\setbox\marginfigbox\vbox\bgroup\hsize270pt} +\def\endmarginfigure{\egroup\ifodd\c@page\else\hspace*{-60pt}\fi\box\marginfigbox\end@float} +%% +\@namedef{marginfigure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}\global\setbox\marginfigbox\vbox\bgroup\hsize495pt} +\@namedef{marginendfigure*}{\egroup\ifodd\c@page\else\hspace*{-60pt}\fi\box\marginfigbox\end@dblfloat} + +\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}} +\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} + +\newcounter{table} +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\thetable{\arabic{table}} +\else +\def\thetable{\@arabic\c@table} +\fi +\def\fps@table{tbp} +\def\ftype@table{2} +\def\ext@table{lot} +\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable} +% V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables +% to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray + +\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}} +\def\endtable{\end@float} + +\newbox\margintabbox +\def\margintable{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}\global\setbox\margintabbox\vbox\bgroup\hsize270pt} +\def\endmargintable{\egroup\ifodd\c@page\else\hspace*{-60pt}\fi\box\margintabbox\end@float} + +% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well. +\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}} +\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} + +\@namedef{margintable*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}\global\setbox\margintabbox\vbox\bgroup\hsize495pt} +\@namedef{marginendtable*}{\egroup\ifodd\c@page\else\hspace*{-60pt}\fi\box\margintabbox\end@dblfloat} + + + + +%% +%% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS +%% +%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX +%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, +%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, +%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. +%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) + + +% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting +\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form +\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse + +\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter +% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray +% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both +\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue + +\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined +\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used + + +% The default math style used by the columns +\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} +% The default text style used by the columns +% default to using the current font +\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} + +% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray +\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} + +% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber +% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package +% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as +% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. +\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} +\def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue} +\def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse} + + +\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray +\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi% +\def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi} + +% flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation +\newif\if@IEEEissubequation% +\@IEEEissubequationfalse + +% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers +\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} + +% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments +% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the +% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} +\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}% +% check if column is defined +\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname% +\else% if not, error and use default type +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak +Using a default centering column instead}% +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname% +\fi% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} + +% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray +\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} + + +% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} + + +% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} + + +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types + + +% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list +% used to build up the \halign preamble +\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% +\@@IEEEappendtoksA} + +% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument +% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register +\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% +\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% +\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} + +% define some common column types for the user +% math +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} +% text +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} + +% vertical rules +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% +{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} + +% horizontal rules +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} + +% plain +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} + +% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} + + +% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} +% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} + +% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column +% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue + + + +% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell +% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] +% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. +\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} + +% creates a blank separator row +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% +% get the skip value, based on the font commands +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% +\else% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% +\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + +% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% +% get the skip value, based on the font commands +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% +\else% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% +\fi% +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + + + +% draws a single rule across all the columns optional +% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] +\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule +% turn off any struts +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + + +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then +% another single rule row +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% +\else% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% +\fi% +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +} + +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then +% another single rule row +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% +\else% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% +\fi% +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +} + + + +% inserts a full row's worth of &'s +% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns +% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% +\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all +\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% +\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count +\repeat% +\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s +} + + + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines +\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used + + + +% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% save values +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} + +% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% restore values +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} + + +% globally restores the strut height and depth to the +% master values and sets the master strut flag to true +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% restore values +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} + + +% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current +% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth +% and the use master strut flag, global +% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried +% into the isolation/strut column +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% +\fi} + + + +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height +% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside +% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut +% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut +% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip +% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current +% font is used. +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\else% arg one present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\else% arg two present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +% remove stretchability, just to be safe +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master +\else% outer, have to set master strut too +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut +\fi} + + +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height +% and depth to both the master and local struts. +% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth +% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use +% of the local strut values. +% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current +% font is used. +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% +\skip0=0pt\relax% +\else% arg one present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% +\skip2=0pt\relax% +\else% arg two present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +% remove stretchability, just to be safe +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size +% get local strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% +% add it to the user supplied values +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% +% update the local strut size +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master +\else% outer, have to set master strut too +% get master strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% add it to the user supplied values +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% +% update the local and master strut sizes +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut +\fi} + + +% allow user a way to see the struts +\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts +\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse + +% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut +% get master strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +\else% +% get local strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% +\fi% +% remove stretchability, probably not needed +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +% allow user to see struts if desired +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% +\else% +\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} + + +% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray +% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. +% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 +\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} +\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% +\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% +\else% +\skip0=#1\relax% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% +\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% +\else% +\skip2=#2\relax% +\fi% +% remove stretchability, probably not needed +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% +\else% +\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} + + +% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the +% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% +\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} + + + +\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} +\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} + +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} + + +% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. +% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. +% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} +\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{% + % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not + % the star form was involked + \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse + \else% not the star form + \global\@eqnswtrue + \fi% if star form + \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations + \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it + \lineskip=0pt\relax + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% + \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build + \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet + \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label + \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line + \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + % put in the column for the equation number + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first + \toks0={##}% + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% + % add the isolation column + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% + % add the equation number col to the preamble + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% + % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax + % begin the display alignment + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines + $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup + % "exspand" the preamble + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} + +% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use +% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, +% restore counters to correct values and exit +\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup% +\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi% +\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne% +$$\@ignoretrue} + +% need a way to remember if last line is a subequation +\newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation% +\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse + +% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to +% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column +% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column + {\ifnum0=`}\fi + \@ifstar{% + \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR + }{% + \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR + }% +} + +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} + +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% + \ifnum0=`{\fi}% + \@@IEEEeqnarraycr + \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% + +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak + environment}% + {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak + specifications.}\relax% + \else + \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count + \repeat + % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column + \fi + % execute the &'s + \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% + % handle the strut/isolation column + \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray + &% and enter the equation number column + % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the + % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was + \if@eqnsw% + \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}% + \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue% + \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter + \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% + \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi% + \fi% + % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers + \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi + \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag + % reset the number of columns the user actually used + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax + % the real end of the line + \cr} + + + + + +% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything +% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second +% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, +% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox +% within an hbox. +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within +% a \hbox{$ $} construct. +% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. +% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - +% natural width is the default. +% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} +% for \vcenter in non-math mode +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% +\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse + +\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} +\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} + +% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs +\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign + \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it + \lineskip=0pt\relax% + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% + \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build + \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing + \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first + \toks0={##}% + % add the isolation column to the preamble + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax + % begin the alignment + \everycr{}% + % use only the very first token to determine the positioning + % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, + % but is probably not worth the effort + % \noindent is used as a delimiter + \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% + \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent + % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded + % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now + \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% + % use the appropriate vbox type + \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% + \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines + \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% + \bgroup + % "exspand" the preamble + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} + +% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, +% exit from math mode if needed, and exit +\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status +&% enter isolation/strut column +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed +\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values +% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray +% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox +\crcr\egroup\egroup% +% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed +\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} + + + +% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to +% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray +% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column +% carry strut status into isolation/strut column +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status +&% enter isolation/strut column +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed +% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% +{\ifnum0=`}\fi% +\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} + +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} + +% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% +\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} + + + +% starts the halign preamble build +\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start +\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known +% ensure these are valid +\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition +% currently acquired numerically referenced glue +% use a name that is easier to remember +\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0% +% tracks number of columns in the preamble +\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% +% record the default end glues +\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% +\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% +% now parse the user's column specifications +\@@IEEEbuildpreamble} + + +% parses and builds the halign preamble +\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% +% use only the very first token to check the end +% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% +% identify current and next token type +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next +% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% +% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% +% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% +% process the acquired glue +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% +% process the acquired col +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% +% ready prevtype for next col spec. +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% +% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group +\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} + + +% executed just after preamble build is completed +% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue +\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax +\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% +{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% +\fi%num cols less than 1 +%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} + + +% Identify and return the column specifier's type code +\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded +% n = number +% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) +% c = letter +% e = \end +% u = undefined +% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char +\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise +\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else +\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences +\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax +\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi +\if#2u\relax +\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% +{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak +as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} + + +% identify the current letter referenced column +% if invalid, use a default column +\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak +Using a default centering column instead}% +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} + + +% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value +\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% +% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) +% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) +% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) +% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) +% ' = \quad 1em +% " = \qquad 2em +% . = 0.5\arraycolsep +% / = \arraycolsep +% ? = 2\arraycolsep +% * = 1fil +% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter +% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero +% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 +% value for 1em. +% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text +% \noindent is used as a delimiter here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +% get the math font 1em value +% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs +% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. +% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure +% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, +% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. +% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. +{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% +% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% +% identify the glue value based on the first token +% we discard anything after the first +\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else +\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else +\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else +\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else +\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak +0pt instead}% +{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak +IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} + + + +% process a numerical digit from the column specification +% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value +% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired +\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak +after the first}% +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% +\else% if we previously aborted a glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion +\else%acquire this number +% save the previous type before the numerical digits started +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% +\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% +\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition +\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% +\else%user glue not defined +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak +0pt instead}% +{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak +\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% +\fi% glue defined or not +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition +\fi%close acquisition, get glue +\fi%discard or acquire number +\fi%prevtype glue or not +} + + +% process an acquired glue +% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble +\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions +\else +% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else +% as this is not used in the preamble, but before +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% +\else%not the start glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak +after the first}% +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue +\else% not a back to back glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi +\toks0={##}% +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi +% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand +% the column definition +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble +\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak +type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak +specifier}% +{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak +between column types.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue +\fi% previous was a column +\fi% back-to-back glues +\fi% is start column glue +\fi% prev type not a +} + + +% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble +\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else +% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) +% so we must add this column to the preamble now +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue +\toks0={##}% +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi +% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand +% the column definition +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble +\fi%next type not numeral +\fi%next type not glue +} + + +%% +%% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS +%% +% set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different +% modes IEEEtran supports +\def\ps@headings{% + \def\@oddhead{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth\vspace*{-13.5pt}\hfill\hbox{\vbox to 29pt{\hsize122.8pt\vspace*{12pt}\OJlogo}}\par\vspace*{-2.25pt}\hbox to \textwidth{\vrule width\textwidth height.3pt depth0pt}}}% + \def\@evenhead{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth\vbox to 0pt{\hsize\textwidth\vspace*{7.7pt}\rfxfont\raggedright\rightmark:\ \leftmark\hfill\par}\par\vspace*{16pt}\hbox to \textwidth{\vrule width\textwidth height.3pt depth0pt}}}% + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox to \textwidth{{\rffont\thepage}\hfill{{\rffont VOLUME\ \@jvol,\ \@pubyear}}}}% + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox to \textwidth{{{\rffont VOLUME\ \@jvol,\ \@pubyear}}\hfill{\rffont\thepage}}}% + }% + % +% title page style +%%%%%%% +\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% + \def\@oddhead{\headertext@blue{\rhfont\leftmark \hfil \rightmark}}% \thepage}% + \def\@evenhead{\headertext@blue{\rhfont\rightmark\hfil \leftmark}}%\thepage + \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth{\vspace*{24pt}% + \footrule@blue{\rule{\textwidth}{2pt}}\vspace*{-28pt}\par% + \rule{\textwidth}{.5pt}\par\vspace*{-15.5pt}% + \Footrule@blue{\rfoot}\vspace*{-10pt}\par% + {\whiteink{\rffont Vol.\ \@jvol,\ No.\ \@jnum,\ \@jmonth\ \@pubyear\hfill Page\ \thepage\par}}}}}% + \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}% +% peer review cover page style +\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% +\def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}% +\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else + \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% + \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% + \fi +\else + % non-draft mode footers + \if@IEEEusingpubid + \footskip 0pt% + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \else + \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \fi + \fi +\fi} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\def\ps@plain{% + \def\@oddhead{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth\vspace*{-13pt}\vbox to 29pt{\hsize126pt\vspace*{11.5pt}\OJlogo}\hfill\par\vspace*{-2.75pt}\hbox to \textwidth{\vrule width\textwidth height.3pt depth0pt}}}% + \let\@evenhead\@oddhead% + \def\@evenfoot{\vbox to 10pt{\hbox to \textwidth{\hfill\rffont This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 License. For more information, see https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/\hfill}\par\vspace*{-12pt}% + \hbox to \textwidth{{\rffont\thepage}\hfill{{\rffont VOLUME\ \@jvol,\ \@pubyear}}}}}% + \def\@oddfoot{\vbox to 10pt{\hbox to \textwidth{\hfill\rffont This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 License. For more information, see https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/\hfill}\par\vspace*{-12pt}% + \hbox to \textwidth{{{\rffont VOLUME\ \@jvol,\ \@pubyear}}\hfill{\rffont\thepage}}}}% + }% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% start with empty headings +\def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{} + + +%% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same +%% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. +%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text +%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually +%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the +%% arguments to \markboth. +\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{{{#1}}}% +\def\rightmark{{{#2}}}} +\def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}} + +\def\today{\ifcase\month\or + January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or + July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi + \space\number\day, \number\year} + + + + +%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS +%% +%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff +% +% +% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], [" +\def\@citex[#1]#2{% + \let\@citea\@empty + \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do + {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% + \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% + \G@refundefinedtrue + \@latex@warning + {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% + {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}} + +% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's +% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the +% following format controls are already defined and will not +% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the +% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" - +% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12] +% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}. +% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will +% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally +% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in +% that \cite. +% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments +% to produce the IEEE style. +\def\citepunct{], [} +\def\citedash{]--[} + +% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty +\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname} + +% V1.6 class files should always provide these +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} +\let\@openbib@code\@empty + + +% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. +% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in +% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty: +% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature} +% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak} +\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}} +\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack + \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% + \@esphack} + +% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before +% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance +% the columns on the last page +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that + % the command is not executed +\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage} + +% allow the user to alter the triggered command +\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}} + +% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the +% command is executed +\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1% +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}% + +% trigger command at the given reference +\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% +\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi} + + +\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} + +% compsoc journals left align the reference numbers +\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{#1.\hfill}} + +% controls bib item spacing +\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt} + +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} + +\def\ackrule{\par\noindent\rule{\textwidth}{.5pt}\par} + +\def\thebibliography#1{% + \section*{\bibsectionfont\refname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% + % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger + \bibliofont\let\it\itshape\vskip 0.2\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% + \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% + \labelsep5pt% + \leftmargin\labelwidth + \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax + %\itemindent10pt% + \itemsep\IEEEbibitemsep\relax + \usecounter{enumiv}% + \let\p@enumiv\@empty + \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem% + \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}% +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% +% originally: +% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% +% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more +% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference. +% IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with +% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, +% but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. +% MDS 11/2000 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100% +\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi% + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax} +\let\endthebibliography=\endlist + + + + +% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS +% +% +% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author +% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font +%\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}} + +\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\bfseries\textit{#1}}} + +% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation. +% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote +% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} +% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you +% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote +% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks. +% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical +% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that +% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding +% with the text above. +% V1.7 make this a robust command +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or% + \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger% + \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}} + + +% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS +% +% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} +% The default if the user does not use an author block +\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} + +% spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode) +% can be negative +\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em} +% compsoc conferences need more space here +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}} + +% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +% This can be negative. +% IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these +% controls in place in case they ever change their mind. +% Personally, I like 0.75ex. +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex} +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex} +% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make +% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the +% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, +% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep +% these above 2.6ex +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex} + +% This tracks the required strut size. +% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used. +\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex} + +% variables to retain font size and style across groups +% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n} + +% saves the current font attributes +\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape} + +% restores the saved font attributes +\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}% +\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}% +\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}% +\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}% +\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}% +\selectfont} + + +% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column +\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse + + +% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace +% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines +% within the halign environment. +% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above +% baseline portion at 70% of the total length. +% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch +\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace% +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}} + + +% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. +% Makes formatting easy for conferences +% +% use real definitions in conference mode +% name block +\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro +% do a spacer row if needed +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column +%restore the correct strut value +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}% +% input the author names +#1% +% end the row if the user did not already +\crcr} +% spacer row for names +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}} +% +% affiliation block +\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro +% do a spacer row if needed +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column +%restore the correct strut value +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}% +% input the author affiliations +#1% +% end the row if the user did not already +\crcr} +% spacer row for affiliations +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}} + + +% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other +% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks. +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +\else + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca + \else% + % not conference or peerreviewca mode + \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}% + \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\par{\affilfont#1}}% + \fi +\fi +% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular +\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style + \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% + \baselineskip=0pt\relax% + \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one + \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing + \everycr{}% ensure no problems here + \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet + \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space + \vtop\bgroup%vtop box + \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax + \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr} + +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox +\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup} + +% handle bogus star form +\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}} + +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] +\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip} + +% end the line and do the optional spacer +\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}} + + + +% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages +\newif\if@IEEEWARNand +\@IEEEWARNandtrue + +% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a +% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid +% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes. +\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override + +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only + when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse} + +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% +\fi +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% +\fi + +\usepackage{color,ifpdf,ifthen} +\AtBeginDocument{% +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJCS}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2}}{%OJCS +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJEMB}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{0.67,1,0.04,0.05}}{%OJEMB +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJIA}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{1,0,0.33,0.35}}{%OJIA +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJIES}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{0,0.61,0.97,0}}{%OJIES +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJNANO}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{1,0,0,0}}{%OJNANO +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJPEL}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{0,1,0.63,0.12}}{%OJPEL +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJSP}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2}}{%OJSP +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJVT}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2}}{%OJVT +}}}}}}}}}% +%% +\definecolor{ojcscol}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2} +\definecolor{ojembcol}{cmyk}{0.67,1,0.04,0.05} +\definecolor{ojiacol}{cmyk}{1,0,0.33,0.35} +\definecolor{ojiescol}{cmyk}{0,0.61,0.97,0} +\definecolor{ojnanocol}{cmyk}{1,0,0,0} +\definecolor{ojpelcol}{cmyk}{0,1,0.63,0.12} +\definecolor{ojspcol}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2} +\definecolor{ojvtcol}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2} +%% +\definecolor{white}{gray}{1} +\definecolor{gray20}{gray}{.80} +\long\def\whiteink#1{{\color{white}{#1}}}% +\long\def\title@green#1{{{#1}}}% + +% page clearing command +% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles +% for the inserted blank pages +\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else +\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} + + +% user command to invoke the title page +\def\maketitle{\par% + \begingroup% + \normalfont% + \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty + \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author + \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well. + \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines + \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info + % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc +%% \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}% +%% \normalsize% +%% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +%% \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% +%% \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks% +%% \else +%% \if@twocolumn% +%% \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% +%% \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% +%% \else +%% \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]% +%% \fi +%% \else + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \twocolumn[\@maketitle]%%\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% +%% \fi + \thispagestyle{plain}%{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks% +%% \fi + % pullup page for pubid if used. +%% \if@IEEEusingpubid +%% \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}% +%% \fi + \endgroup + \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax + \gdef\@thanks{}% + % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers + % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}% + \let\thanks\relax} + + + +% V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext +\long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% TB Maketitle %%%%%%%%%% +\def\corfont{\reset@font\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{6.6}{7.5}\selectfont\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\editorfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{12}{14}\selectfont\leftskip4pc\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\sptitlefont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{16}{18}\selectfont\leftskip4pc\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\titlefont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{22}{24}\selectfont\bfseries\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +%%\def\affiliation#1{\par\vskip12pt{\affilfont#1}\par}% +\def\doi@font{\fontsize{6}{9}\selectfont\normalfont\itshape\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\doiinfo#1{\gdef\@doiinfo{#1}\par}% +\doiinfo{} +\def\sptitle#1{\gdef\@sptitle{#1}}\sptitle{} +\def\editor#1{\gdef\@editor{#1}}\editor{} +\def\authornote#1{\gdef\@authornote{#1}}\authornote{} +\newbox\tempbox +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\def\@maketitle{\newpage + \bgroup% + \vspace*{-10.5pt}% + {\receivedfont \ifx\@receiveddate\@empty\else Received\ \@receiveddate\fi\ifx\@revised\@empty\else;\ revised\ \@reviseddate\fi\ifx\@accepteddate\@empty\else;\ accepted\ \@accepteddate\fi\ifx\@publisheddate\@empty\else; Date of publication\nobreakspace\@publisheddate\fi\ifx\@currentdate\@empty\else;\space date of current version\nobreakspace\@currentdate\fi.\space\ifx\@editor\@empty\else\@editor\fi\par}% + \ifx\@doiinfo\@empty\else\vskip3pt{\doi@font Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/\@doiinfo\par}\fi% + \vskip14.5pt{\titlefont{\textcolor{ojcolor}{\@title}}\par\vskip8.5pt}% + {\authorfont\@author\par}\vskip4pt{\afffont\@affil}\par\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\vskip5pt% + \ifx\@corresp\@empty\else{\corfont\@corresp\par}\vskip5.5pt\fi% + \ifx\@authornote\@empty\else{\afffont\@authornote\par}\vskip27.5pt\fi% + % + \centerline{\rule{36pc}{.5pt}}\par\vskip11.5pt% + \ifvoid\abstractbox\else{\reset@font\box\abstractbox}\fi\par\vskip11.5pt% + \ifvoid\keybox\else{\reset@font\box\keybox}\fi\par\vskip-32pt% + \centerline{\rule{36pc}{.5pt}}%% + \par\addvspace{33.5pt}\egroup% + \let\maketitle\relax +}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}% +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}% +\hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} + +% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def +% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule +\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue} + + +\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape + \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}} +\let\@thanks\@empty + +% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par. + +% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and +% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts. +\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}% +\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% +\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax} + + +% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item +\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks +% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule + {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax + \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item} +\else +% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}} +% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[] +\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}% +{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}} +% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument +\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break +\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces} +\fi + + +% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn +\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace] +\else +\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip +\fi +\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}} +\else +% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax} +\fi + +% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers. +\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}% +\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par +\end{center}} + + + +% V1.6 +% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text +% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column +% of two column text (technotes). +\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize +% adjust spacing to next text +% v1.6b handle peer review papers +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages +% regardless of the other paper modes + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip +\else + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% + \else% + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% + \else% journal uses more space + \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip% + \fi + \fi +\fi}} + + +% V1.6 +% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors +% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two +% column text (most common) +% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the +% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip +% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the +% text on the titlepage +% The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account. +\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{% + % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done + \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height + \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height + \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names + \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns + \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines + % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer + % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to + % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be + % lengthened + % default to journal values + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}% + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}% + % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% + \fi + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% + \fi% + % get the height that the title will take up + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview + \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}% + \else + \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}% + \fi + \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign + % add the height of the page textheight + \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight% + % correct for title pages using pubid + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else + % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only. + % And the cover page uses a static spacer. + \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi + \fi% + % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer + \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% + % \topskip takes away some too + \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip% + % calculate the column height of the main text for lines + % now we calculate the main text height as if holding + % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first + % and discard any excess fractional remainder + % we subtracted the first line, because the first line + % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the + % rest of the lines. + \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight% + \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% + \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% + % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will + % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always + % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer + % number of normal size lines + % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer + % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register + \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight% + \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight% + \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip% + % this is the calculated height of the spacer + % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer + % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register + \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight% + \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value + % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase + \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax% + \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% + % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead + \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax% + \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% + \fi% + \else% + % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease + \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% + \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% + \fi% + % set the calculated rigid spacer + \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}} + + + +% V1.6 +% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area +% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed +% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer. +\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax +\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}} + +% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords +% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for +% in the dynamic sizer. +\let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax +\long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}} +% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if +% not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed +% in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode. +\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{% +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi +\else% or if not compsoc +\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi} + + +% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current +% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing. +\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont +\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip% +\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax} + + +% abstract and keywords are in \small, except +% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize +% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small +% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt +\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small} +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine + \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize} +\fi + +% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}} +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}} + + + + +% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines +% so that spacing is more tightly controlled. +\newbox\abstractbox +\def\abstract{\global\setbox\abstractbox\vbox\bgroup\parindent0pt\hsize\textwidth\abstractfont\textcolor{ojcolor}{\abstractheadfont\bfseries ABSTRACT}\unskip\unskip\unskip\ignorespaces\hspace*{3pt}}% +% V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in +% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it) +\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi + \par\egroup\normalfont\normalsize}% +%%%%%%%% +\def\receivedfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{9}\selectfont\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill}% +\def\receiveddate#1{\gdef\@receiveddate{#1}}\receiveddate{}% +\def\reviseddate#1{\gdef\@reviseddate{#1}}\reviseddate{}% +\def\accepteddate#1{\gdef\@accepteddate{#1}}\accepteddate{}% +\def\publisheddate#1{\gdef\@publisheddate{#1}}\publisheddate{}% +\def\currentdate#1{\gdef\@currentdate{#1}}\currentdate{}% +%%%%%%%%%% +\newbox\keybox +\def\IEEEkeywords{\global\setbox\keybox\vbox\bgroup\parindent0pt\hsize\textwidth\unskip\unskip\unskip\ignorespaces\abstractfont\noindent{{\abstractheadfont\textcolor{ojcolor}{\bfseries\IEEEkeywordsname}}}\unskip\unskip\unskip\ignorespaces\hspace*{3pt}% + }% +\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace*{32pt}\fi + \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% + \egroup\normalfont\normalsize} + +% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference +\def\abstract{\normalfont + \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip + \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip + \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip + \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} + \else% compsoc not conference +\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax + \else + \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent + \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax + \else + \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} + \fi +\fi + + + +% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that +% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token +% +% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input +% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not +% affect the formatting of the text +\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ % +\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +% a control space will come in as a macro +% when it is the last one on a line +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one +% else spit it out and stop gobbling +\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else% +\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi% +\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}% + + + + +% TITLING OF SECTIONS +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are + % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space + % spacing from section number to title +% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ } +\fi\fi + + +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax} + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% compsoc journals need extra spacing +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% +\else + \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} +\fi% +\fi% + +%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control +%and use \@@par rather than \par +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \let\@svsec\@empty + \else + \refstepcounter{#1}% + % load section label and spacer into \@svsec + \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% + \fi% + \@tempskipa #5\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high + \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading + \noindent % subsections are NOT indented + % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title + % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal + {\hskip #3\relax{\@svsec}}{\interlinepenalty \@M {#8}\@@par}% + }% + \endgroup + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}% + \else % printout low level headings + % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} + % got rid of sectionmark stuff + \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax{\@svsec #8\ifnum#2=3\else.\fi}}%\@IEEEsectpunct%%%\@@par + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}% + \fi%skip down + \@xsect{#5}} + +%% SECTION heading spacing and font +%% +% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name +% (for \@sect) #2 - section level +% #3 - section heading indent +% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text) +% If negative, make stretch parts negative too! +% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading, +% negative: amount to indent main text after heading +% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation +% #6 - font control +% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent +% trouble when you do something like: +% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... +% IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section +% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good +% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber. +%% \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% +%% % IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode +%% \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% +%% {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\raggedright}}% +%% \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% +%% {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% +%% \else % for journals + \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-13pt \@plus -2pt \@minus -2pt}{0.0001pt}{\sectionfont}}% + \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-13pt \@plus -2pt \@minus -2pt}{1pt}{\subsectionfont}}% +%%\fi% + +% for both journals and conferences +% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-23pt \@plus -2pt \@minus -2pt}{1pt}{\subsubsectionfont}}% +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{-11pt \@plus-2pt \@minus-2pt}{1pt}{\paragraphfont}}% + + +%% % compsoc +%% \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +%% \ifCLASSOPTIONconference +%% % compsoc conference +%% \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% +%% {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}% +%% \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% +%% {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}% +%% \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% +%% {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}% +%% \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% +%% {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% +%% \else% compsoc journals +%% % use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles +%% \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% +%% {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% +%% % Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society, +%% % I have to look up an example. +%% \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}% +%% {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}% +%% \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}% +%% {0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}% +%% \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}% +%% {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% +%% \fi\fi + + + + +%% ENVIRONMENTS +% "box" symbols at end of proofs +\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box +% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one +\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}} +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc +\else +\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed +\fi + +% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support +% for an optional argument. +\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}} +\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\addvspace{12pt \@plus2pt \@minus2pt}\noindent{{\itshape #1: }}\par\noindent} +\def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par} + + +%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable +\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep12pt\rmfamily\trivlist% + \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2:}]\leavevmode\par\noindent\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep12pt\rmfamily \trivlist% +% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics +% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. + \item[\hskip\labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\leavevmode\par\noindent\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} +% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with +% lines below. +\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} + +% V1.6 +% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection +% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic. +% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number +% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator. +% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection +% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed. +% +% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override +\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}} +% string macro +\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section} + +% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection +% if section in_counter is used +\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% + \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname + {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]% + \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3} + \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% + \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep + \@thmcounter{#1}}% + \else + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep + \@thmcounter{#1}}% + \fi + \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% + \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} + + + +%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE +\ps@headings +\pagenumbering{arabic} + +% normally the page counter starts at 1 +\setcounter{page}{1} +% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1 +% (for duplex printing) +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview + \if@twoside + \setcounter{page}{-1} + \else + \setcounter{page}{0} + \fi +\fi + +% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as +% needed when single sided +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi +% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and +% enforce a rigid position for the last lines +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn +% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else + \twocolumn + \fi +\sloppy +\flushbottom +\fi + + + + +% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions + +% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package +% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau +% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command +% is present or not. +% For instance: +% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}} +% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if +% \appendices is invoked. +% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending +% on whether the user specifies a title: +% \section{My appendix title} +% or not: +% \section{} +% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title +% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of +% contents +\begingroup +\catcode`\Q=3 +\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} +\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} +\endgroup +% end of \@ifmtarg defs + + +% V1.7 +% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition +% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices +% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other +% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.) +\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section +\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax} + +% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument} +% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no +% argument (title) +% note we reroute the call to the old \section* +\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{% +\@ifmtarg{#1}{% +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{% +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}} + +% we use this if the user calls \section{} after +% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the +% command and its argument. Then, warn the user. +\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless +\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}} + + +% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls +% and in the Table of Contents. +% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself + +% appendix command for one single appendix +% normally has no heading. However, if you want a +% heading, you can do so via the optional argument: +% \appendix[Optional Heading] +\def\appendix{\relax} +\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique + \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}% + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% + \setcounter{section}{0}% + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% + \gdef\thesection{A}% + \gdef\thesectiondis{}% + \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}% + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A} + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter + \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{% + \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}% + % redefine \section command for appendix + % leave \section* as is + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% + \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument + % of the normal form +} + + + +% appendices command for multiple appendices +% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to +% declare the individual appendices +\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique + \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}% + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% + \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0 + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% + \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices% + \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}% + \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}% + \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}% + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}} + \else% + \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}% + \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}% + \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}% + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}} + \fi% + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter + \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix + % redefine \section command for appendices + % leave \section* as is + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form + \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so, + \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument + % of the normal form +} + + + +% \IEEEPARstart +% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the +% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter +% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the +% first word which will be rendered in upper case. +% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to: +% +% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment +% within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart. +% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family +% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that +% interword glue will now work as normal. +% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. +% +% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. +% +% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users +% to change the font style. +% +% the number of lines that are indented to clear it +% may need to increase if using decenders +\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2} +% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to +% be overly cautious +\def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2} +% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text +% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called). +\def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T} +% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline +% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum +% of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current +% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip +% so that it can respond to changes therein. +\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip} +% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in, +% can take zero or one argument. +\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries} +% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify +% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument. +\def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} +% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word, +% can take zero or one argument. +\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax} +% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify +% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument. +\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} +% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. +% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced +% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. +\def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em} +% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap. +\def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em} +% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap. +\def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/} + +% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries} +\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape} +\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax} +\fi + +% definition of \IEEEPARstart +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES +% +% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use +% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter +% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second +% argument is the rest of the first word(s). +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{% +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start +% on a new one +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% +% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE +% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued +\noindent +% calculate the desired height of the big letter +% it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font +% down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}% +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% +% extract the name of the current font in bold +% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME +\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% +{\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% +\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}% +% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired +% height of the drop letter +\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% +% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}% +% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the +% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% +\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% +\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% +\fi% +% and store it as a counter +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% +% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital +% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, +% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA +% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB +% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer +% division. Hence the use of the counters. +% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will +% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% +% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by +% floating point values +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the +% big letter. +\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% +% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the +% hanging indent +\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont +\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}% +% end of the isolated calculation environment +% add in the extra clearance we want +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax% +% add in the optional offset +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax% +% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the +% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use +% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command +% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other +% text won't be displaced by it. +\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% +\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% +\raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}% +\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}% +\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}% +{\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}} + + + + + + +% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater +% than the specified space of argument one +% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) +% and issue a \newpage +% +% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} +% +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to +% be overly cautious +% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau +% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, +% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine +% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead +\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left +\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% +\newpage% +\fi\endgroup} + + +% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT +% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size) +% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic! +% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a +% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo. +% MDS 7/2001 +% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries +\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue + +% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies +% and not just the previous section +\newcounter{IEEEbiography} +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0} + +% photo area size +\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area +\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area +% area cleared for photo +\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area +\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area + % actual depth will be a multiple of + % \baselineskip, rounded up +\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{20pt}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography + +\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{% +\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\rmfamily}\fontsize{8}{9}\selectfont%\footnotesize% +\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500% +% we need enough space to support the hanging indent +% the nominal value of the spacer +% and one extra line for good measure +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip% +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start +% with a new one +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}% +% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill +\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN% plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% +% the default box for where the photo goes +\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{% +\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}% +% +% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the +% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above +% and if so, override the default box with what they want +\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}% +\centering% +#1% +\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before +\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump +% to the biography, not the previous section +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% +\fi% +% one more biography +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}% +% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the +% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so +% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the +% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces. +\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command +\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate +% set the hanging indent +\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth% +\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}% +% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything +\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{% +\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}% +% now place the author name and begin the bio text +\noindent{\sffamily\bfseries \textcolor{ojcolor}{#2}\unskip\ignorespaces}\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par% +% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area +% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry +% MDS +\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding + \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% + \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut +\fi% +\par\normalfont} + + + +% V1.6 +% added biography without a photo environment +\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{% +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before +\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump +% to the biography, not the previous section +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% +\fi% +% one more biography +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}% +\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500% +\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% +\parskip=0pt\par% +\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont} + +% provide the user with some old font commands +% got this from article.cls +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} + + +% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS +% +% holds the special notice text +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax} + +% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do: +% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle +\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{% +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\centerline{\sffamily\itshape\small{#1}}\vspace*{1em}\mbox{}}% +} + + + + +% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS +% to insert a publisher's ID footer +% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style +% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle +% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page +% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into +% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author +% names and the maintext. +% +% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the +% publisher's ID footer +% IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, +% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip} +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote +% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no +% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the +% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the +% second column +% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on +% Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for +% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip +% and call it even. +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip} +\fi + +% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt} +\fi + +% holds the ID text +\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax} + +% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called +\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid +\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse +% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom +% V1.6 use before \maketitle +\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue} + + +% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in +% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of +% the title page when using \IEEEpubid +% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or +% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid +% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the +% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this +% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility +% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been +% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page. +% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc +\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else +\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi} + +% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other +% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to +% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX. + + + +%% Lockout some commands under various conditions + +% general purpose bit bucket +\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin} + +% flags to prevent multiple warning messages +\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext +\@IEEEWARNthankstrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue + + +%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed +%% +% save commands which might be locked out +% so that the user can later restore them if needed +\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext + + +% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode +% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter +% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch +% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft +% paper. +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart + is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} +\fi +% and for technotes +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart + is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} +\fi + + +% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid, +% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. +% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead +% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen +% from filling up with redundant messages +\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse} +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} + + +% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently. +% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname +% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname ) +% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine +% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the +% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command +% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX +% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break. +% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal +% name can be left undisturbed. +\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse% +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} +% and make biography point to our bogus biography +\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography +\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography + +\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse% +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} + +\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse} +\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse} +\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse} +\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse} +\fi + + +% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out +\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{% +\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}% +\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks% +\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart% +\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography% +\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography% +\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto% +\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto% +\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid% +\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol% +\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership% +\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext} + + + +% need a backslash character for typeout output +{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12 +|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}} + + +% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings +\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno). +Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} + + +% provide for legacy commands +\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} +\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} +\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} +\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} +\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} +\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} +\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED} +\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed} +\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen} +\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} + + + +% provide for legacy environments +\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography} +\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto} +\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} +\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography} +\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto} +\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} + + +% provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible +\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent +\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} +\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth} +\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep} +\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc} +\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl} +\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr} + +% let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded +% \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof +\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}} + +% V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported. +\def\overrideIEEEmargins{% +\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}% +\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}} + +\def\jvol#1{\gdef\@jvol{#1}}\jvol{} +% +\def\paper#1{\gdef\@paper{#1}}\paper{} +% +\def\jnum#1{\gdef\@jnum{#1}}\jnum{} +% +\def\jname#1{\gdef\@jname{#1}}\jname{} +% +\def\jmonth#1{\gdef\@jmonth{{#1}}}\jmonth{} +% +\def\pubyear#1{\gdef\@pubyear{#1}}\pubyear{} +% +\def\JournalAcronym#1{\gdef\@JourAcronym{#1}}\JournalAcronym{OJCS} +% +\def\authorfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{10}{13.5}\selectfont\bfseries\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\afffont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{6.6}{7.5}\selectfont\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\rfoot{\rule{\textwidth}{10pt}\par}% +\def\rhfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{11}{11}\selectfont}% +\def\foliofont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{16}{16}\selectfont}% +\def\rffont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{6}{6}\selectfont}% +\def\rfxfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{7}\selectfont}% +\def\bibliofont{\fontfamily{\rmdefault}\fontsize{8}{9}\selectfont}% +% +\def\tablefont{\fontfamily{\rmdefault}\fontsize{8}{10}\selectfont} +\def\tablecapfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{9}\selectfont\bfseries\rightskip0pt plus1fill} +\def\tablecapnumfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{9}\selectfont\bfseries} +\def\figcapfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{9}\selectfont\bfseries\rightskip0pt plus1fill} +\def\figcapnumfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{9}\selectfont\bfseries} +\def\abstractfont{\fontfamily{\rmdefault}\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont\leftskip3pc\rightskip3pc} +\def\abstractheadfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont} +\def\sectionfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\bfseries\raggedright} +\def\bibsectionfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\bfseries\raggedright} +\def\subsectionfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\bfseries\itshape\raggedright} +\def\subsubsectionfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\raggedright} +\def\paragraphfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\itshape\raggedright} +% +\newdimen\footheight +\footheight\z@ + +%\usepackage{graphicx} + +\global\setlength\paperwidth{8.5in} +\global\setlength\paperheight{11in} + +\newdimen\typeheight\typeheight60pc% +\newdimen\typewidth\typewidth42pc% +\global\setlength\textheight{55.5pc} +\global\setlength\textwidth{42pc} + +\global\topmargin30pt +\oddsidemargin55.5pt%3.6pc +\evensidemargin55.5pt + +\setlength\headheight{5.1\p@}% +\setlength\headsep {37.6pt}% \typeheight - \textheight - \headheight +\setlength\topskip {7.2\p@} +\setlength\splittopskip {\topskip} +\addtolength\textheight{-1.25pt} +% +% COLORS DEFINITIONS +% +%% +%\parskip5.75pt +%\raggedright% +\voffset-6.75pc +\hoffset-5.3pc +%% %%%% +%% \def\Gin@setfile#1#2#3{% +%% \ifx\\#2\\\Gread@false\fi +%% \ifGin@bbox\else +%% \ifGread@ +%% \csname Gread@% +%% \expandafter\ifx\csname Gread@#1\endcsname\relax +%% eps% +%% \else +%% #1% +%% \fi +%% \endcsname{\Gin@base#2}% +%% \else +%% \Gin@nosize{#3}% +%% \fi +%% \fi +%% \Gin@viewport@code +%% \Gin@nat@height\Gin@ury bp% +%% \advance\Gin@nat@height-\Gin@lly bp% +%% \Gin@nat@width\Gin@urx bp% +%% \advance\Gin@nat@width-\Gin@llx bp% +%% \Gin@req@sizes +%% \expandafter\ifx\csname Ginclude@#1\endcsname\relax +%% \Gin@drafttrue +%% \expandafter\ifx\csname Gread@#1\endcsname\relax +%% \@latex@error{Can not include graphics of type: #1}\@ehc +%% \global\expandafter\let\csname Gread@#1\endcsname\@empty +%% \fi +%% \fi +%% \leavevmode +%% \ifGin@draft +%% \hb@xt@\Gin@req@width{% +%% \vrule\hss +%% \vbox to \Gin@req@height{% +%% \hrule \@width \Gin@req@width +%% \vss +%% \edef\@tempa{#3}% +%% \rlap{ \ttfamily\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\@tempa}% +%% \vss +%% \hrule}% +%% \hss\vrule}% +%% \else +%% \@addtofilelist{#3}% +%% \ProvidesFile{#3}[Graphic file (type #1)]% +%% \setbox\z@\hbox{\csname Ginclude@#1\endcsname{#3}}% +%% \dp\z@\z@ +%% \ht\z@\Gin@req@height +%% \wd\z@\Gin@req@width +%% \centerline{\fboxrule1pt\fbox{\box\z@}}% + +%% \fi} +%% +%%%% +\def\HHline{% + \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi{\hrule \@height.5pt} \futurelet% + \@tempa\@xhline} +%% +\def\Hline{% + \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\hrule \@height.5pt\futurelet% + \@tempa\@xhline} +%% +\def\colrule{\\[-5.9pt]\Hline\\[-6pt]} +\def\toprule{\\[-10pt]\HHline\\[-6pt]} +\def\botrule{\\\\[-4pt]\HHline} +%% +%% \let\IEEEbiography\IEEEbiographynophoto +%% \let\endIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiographynophoto +%% +\parindent10pt%% +%% +\def\@outputpageaaa{% +\begingroup % the \endgroup is put in by \aftergroup + \let \protect \noexpand + \@resetactivechars + \global\let\@@if@newlist\if@newlist + \global\@newlistfalse + \@parboxrestore + \shipout \vbox{% + \set@typeset@protect + \aftergroup \endgroup + \aftergroup \set@typeset@protect + % correct? or just restore by ending + % the group? + \if@specialpage + \global\@specialpagefalse\@nameuse{ps@\@specialstyle}% + \fi + \if@twoside + \ifodd\count\z@ \let\@thehead\@oddhead \let\@thefoot\@oddfoot + \let\@themargin\oddsidemargin + \else \let\@thehead\@evenhead + \let\@thefoot\@evenfoot \let\@themargin\evensidemargin + \fi + \fi + \reset@font + \normalsize + \normalsfcodes + \let\label\@gobble + \let\index\@gobble + \let\glossary\@gobble + \baselineskip\z@skip \lineskip\z@skip \lineskiplimit\z@ + \@begindvi + \vskip \topmargin + %\ifodd\c@page\else\advance\@themargin\extramargin\fi% + \moveright\@themargin \vbox {% + \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox to\headheight{% + \vfil + \color@hbox + \normalcolor + \hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thehead}% + \color@endbox + }% %% 22 Feb 87 + \dp\@tempboxa \z@ + \box\@tempboxa + \vskip \headsep + \box\@outputbox + \baselineskip \footskip + \color@hbox + \normalcolor + \hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thefoot}% + \color@endbox + }% + }% + \global\let\if@newlist\@@if@newlist + \global \@colht \textheight + \stepcounter{page}% + \let\firstmark\botmark +} +%% +\newif\ifCUPmtlplainloaded +%% \usepackage[fleqn]{amsmath} +%% \@mathmargin=1sp +\newcount\authorcount +\newcount\chkaucount +\newcount\tempcount +\newcount\affcount +\def\affilmark#1{\textsuperscript{#1}} +\long\def\author#1{\global\advance\authorcount\@ne\expandafter\gdef\csname author\romannumeral\the\authorcount\endcsname{#1}} +\long\def\affil#1{\global\advance\affcount\@ne\expandafter\gdef\csname affil\romannumeral\the\affcount\endcsname{#1}} +\long\def\corresp#1{\gdef\@corresp{#1}}\corresp{} +\def\@author{% +\ifnum\authorcount>\z@% + \chkaucount=\authorcount% + \tempcount=\z@% + \loop% + \ifnum\authorcount>\z@% + \advance\tempcount\@ne% + {\authorfont\csname author\romannumeral\the\tempcount\endcsname}% + \advance\authorcount\m@ne% + \ifnum\chkaucount=\tw@% + \ifnum\authorcount>\z@{\authorfont\ AND\ }\fi% + \else% + {\authorfont\ifnum\authorcount>\@ne,\space\else\ifnum\authorcount>\z@,\ AND\ \fi\fi}% + \fi% + \repeat% +\fi% +} +%% +\def\@affil{% +\ifnum\affcount>\z@% + \tempcount=\z@% + \loop% + \ifnum\affcount>\z@% + \advance\tempcount\@ne% + {\afffont\textsuperscript{\the\tempcount}\csname affil\romannumeral\the\tempcount\endcsname\par}% + \advance\affcount\m@ne% + \repeat% +\fi% +} +%% +%% +\def\chapterinitial#1{\noindent{\vrule width9pt height9pt depth0pt}\ {\sffamily\bfseries\scshape #1}} +\usepackage{wrapfig,array} +\newbox\quotebox +\newskip\quoteskp +\newskip\sdquoteskp +\newcount\quotecnt +%% +%% +\def\rhfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{9}\selectfont\bfseries} +\def\qfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{13}{13}\selectfont\bfseries} +\def\qrfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{10}{10}\selectfont} +\def\qbfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{12}{12}\selectfont} +\def\OJlogo{\textcolor{ojcolor}{\fboxsep1pt\fboxrule=1pt\fbox{\hbox to 10pc{\hfill\qfont OJ Logo\hfill}}}} +\parskip0pt% +\parindent10pt% +\columnsep12pt +\setlength\footskip{26.5pt}%.35in} +\setlength\footnotesep{6.65\p@} +\setlength{\skip\footins}{12\p@ \@plus 6\p@ \@minus 6\p@}% change + based on FN font height +\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins +\sloppy +\clubpenalty10000 +\widowpenalty10000% +\@lowpenalty 51 +\@medpenalty 151 +\@highpenalty 301 +%% +%% +\AtBeginDocument{% +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \let\@svsec\@empty + \else + \refstepcounter{#1}% + \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% + \fi + \@tempskipa #5\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup + #6{% + {\hskip #3\relax\ifnum #2 = \@ne\textcolor{ojcolor}{\@svsec}\else{\@svsec}\fi}% + \interlinepenalty \@M \ifnum #2 = \@ne\textcolor{ojcolor}{#8}\else{#8}\fi\@@par}% + \endgroup + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \fi + #7}% + \else + \def\@svsechd{% + #6{\hskip #3\relax + \@svsec #8}% + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \fi + #7}}% + \fi + \@xsect{#5}} +%% +\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi + \par + \@tempskipa #4\relax + \@afterindenttrue + \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@ + \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse + \fi + \if@nobreak + \everypar{}% + \else + \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa + \fi + \@ifstar + {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}{#2}}% + {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}} +%% +\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \@tempskipa #3\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup + #4{% + \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}% + \interlinepenalty \@M \ifnum#5=1\textcolor{ojcolor}{#6}\else#6\fi\@@par}% + \endgroup + \else + \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax \ifnum#5=1\textcolor{ojcolor}{#6}\else#6\fi}}% + \fi + \@xsect{#3}} +}%% +%% +\def\UrlBreaks{\do\.\do\@\do\\\do\/\do\!\do\_\do\|\do\;\do\>\do\]% + \do\)\do\,\do\?\do\'\do+\do\=\do\#\do\-}% +\def\UrlBigBreaks{\do\:\do@url@hyp}% +\def\UrlNoBreaks{\do\(\do\[\do\{\do\<}% +% any ordinary characters that aren't usually: +\def\UrlOrds{\do\*\do\-\do\~\do\'\do\"\do\-}% +\def\UrlSpecials{\do\ {\Url@space}\do\%{\Url@percent}\do\^^M{\Url@space}% + \Url@force@Tilde}% package option may force faked text-ascii-tild +%% +\def\footnoterule{\relax%\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule +\kern-5pt +\hbox to \columnwidth{\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} +\kern4.6pt} +%% +\endinput + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEphot.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% That's all folks! + diff --git a/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ojim.pdf b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ojim.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b4c7c34 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ojim.pdf differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ojim.png b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ojim.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..56eb444 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ojim.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ojim.tex b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ojim.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..21d39eb --- /dev/null +++ b/OJ_Template/Template/IEEE-open-journal-template/ojim.tex @@ -0,0 +1,938 @@ +\documentclass{IEEEoj} +\usepackage{cite} +\usepackage{amsmath,amssymb,amsfonts} +\usepackage{algorithmic} +\usepackage{graphicx,color} +\usepackage{textcomp} +\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em + T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}} +\AtBeginDocument{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{0.93,0.59,0.15,0.02}} +\def\OJlogo{\vspace{-14pt}\includegraphics[height=28pt]{OJIM.png}} +\begin{document} +\receiveddate{XX Month, XXXX} +\reviseddate{XX Month, XXXX} +\accepteddate{XX Month, XXXX} +\publisheddate{XX Month, XXXX} +\currentdate{XX Month, XXXX} +\doiinfo{OJIM.2022.1234567} + +\title{Preparation of Papers for IEEE OPEN JOURNALS} + +\author{FIRST A. AUTHOR\authorrefmark{1}, FELLOW, IEEE, SECOND B. +AUTHOR\authorrefmark{2}, AND THIRD C. AUTHOR,~JR.\authorrefmark{1,2}, +MEMBER, IEEE} +\affil{National Institute of Standards and +Technology, Boulder, CO 80305 USA} +\affil{Department of Physics, Colorado State University, Fort Collins, +CO 80523 USA} +\corresp{CORRESPONDING AUTHOR: First A. Author (e-mail: author@ boulder.nist.gov).} +\authornote{This work was supported by the Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council (NSERC) of Canada.} +\markboth{Preparation of Papers for IEEE OPEN JOURNALS}{Author \textit{et al.}} + +\begin{abstract} +These instructions give you guidelines for preparing papers for IEEE +Open Journal of Instrumentation and Measurement. + Otherwise, use this document as an instruction set. The electronic file of your paper will be formatted further at IEEE. Paper titles should be written in uppercase and lowercase letters, not all uppercase. Avoid writing long formulas with subscripts in the title; short formulas that identify the elements are fine (e.g., ``Nd--Fe--B''). Do not write ``(Invited)'' in the title. Full names of authors are preferred in the author field, but are not required. Put a space between authors' initials. The abstract must be a concise yet comprehensive reflection of what is in your article. In particular, the abstract must be self-contained, without abbreviations, footnotes, or references. It should be a microcosm of the full article. The abstract must be between 150--250 words. Be sure that you adhere to these limits; otherwise, you will need to edit your abstract accordingly. The abstract must be written as one paragraph, and should not contain displayed mathematical equations or tabular material. The abstract should include three or four different keywords or phrases, as this will help readers to find it. It is important to avoid over-repetition of such phrases as this can result in a page being rejected by search engines. Ensure that your abstract reads well and is grammatically correct. +\end{abstract} + +\begin{IEEEkeywords} +Enter key words or phrases in alphabetical order, separated by commas. For a list of suggested keywords, send a blank e-mail to keywords@ieee.org or visit +http://www.ieee.org/\discretionary{}{}{}organizations/pubs/ani\textunderscore prod/keywrd98.txt +\end{IEEEkeywords} + +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} + +\maketitle + +\section{INTRODUCTION} +\IEEEPARstart{T}{his} document is a template for \LaTeX. If you are +reading a paper or PDF version of this document, please download the +electronic file, trans\_jour.tex, from the IEEE Web site at \underline +{http://ieeeauthorcenter.ieee.org/create-your-ieee-article/}\break\underline{use-authoring-tools-and-ieee-article-templates/ieee-article-}\break\underline{templates/} so you can use it to prepare your manuscript. +You can also explore using the Overleaf editor at +{https://www.overleaf.com/blog/278-how-to-use-overleaf-with-ieee-collabratec-your-quick-guide-to-getting-started\break\#.xsVp6tpPkrKM9} + +If your paper is intended for a conference, please contact your conference +editor concerning acceptable formats for your particular +conference. + +IEEE will do the final formatting of your paper. If your paper is intended +for a conference, please observe the conference page limits. + +\subsection{ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS} +Define abbreviations and acronyms the first time they are used in the text, +even after they have already been defined in the abstract. Abbreviations +such as IEEE, SI, ac, and dc do not have to be defined. Abbreviations that +incorporate periods should not have spaces: write ``C.N.R.S.,'' not ``C. N. +R. S.'' Do not use abbreviations in the title unless they are unavoidable +(for example, ``IEEE'' in the title of this article). + +\subsection{OTHER RECOMMENDATIONS} +Use one space after periods and colons. Hyphenate complex modifiers: +``zero-field-cooled magnetization.'' Avoid dangling participles, such as, +``Using (1), the potential was calculated.'' [It is not clear who or what +used (1).] Write instead, ``The potential was calculated by using (1),'' or +``Using (1), we calculated the potential.'' + +Use a zero before decimal points: ``0.25,'' not ``.25.'' Use ``cm$^3$,'' not +``cc.'' Indicate sample dimensions as ``0.1 cm \texttimes 0.2 cm,'' not +``0.1 \texttimes 0.2 cm$^{2}$.'' The abbreviation for ``seconds'' is ``s,'' +not ``sec.'' Use ``Wb/m$^{2}$'' or ``webers per square meter,'' not +``webers/m$^2$.'' When expressing a range of values, write ``7 to 9'' or +``7-9,'' not ``7\textasciitilde 9.'' + +A parenthetical statement at the end of a sentence is punctuated outside of +the closing parenthesis (like this). (A parenthetical sentence is punctuated +within the parentheses.) In American English, periods and commas are within +quotation marks, like ``this period.'' Other punctuation is ``outside''! +Avoid contractions; for example, write ``do not'' instead of ``don't.'' The +serial comma is preferred: ``A, B, and C'' instead of ``A, B and C.'' + +If you wish, you may write in the first person singular or plural and use +the active voice (``I observed that \textellipsis'' or ``We observed that \textellipsis'' +instead of ``It was observed that \textellipsis''). Remember to check spelling. If +your native language is not English, please get a native English-speaking +colleague to carefully proofread your paper. + +Try not to use too many typefaces in the same article. You're writing +scholarly papers, not ransom notes. Also please remember that MathJax +can't handle really weird typefaces. + +\subsection{EQUATIONS} +To make your equations more +compact, you may use the solidus (~/~), the exp function, or appropriate +exponents. Use parentheses to avoid ambiguities in denominators. Punctuate +equations when they are part of a sentence, as in +\begin{equation} +\label{eq1} +x=\frac{111111111}{12345679}=9 . +\end{equation} +Note that $x$ is math mode because it is a variable. +Be sure that the symbols in your equation have been defined before the +equation appears or immediately following. Italicize symbols ($T$ might refer +to temperature, but T is the unit tesla). Refer to ``(1),'' not ``Eq. (1)'' +or ``equation (1),'' except at the beginning of a sentence: ``Equation (1) +is \textellipsis .'' + +\subsection{\LaTeX-SPECIFIC ADVICE} + +Please use ``soft'' (e.g., \verb|\eqref{Eq}|) cross references instead +of ``hard'' references (e.g., \verb|(1)|). That will make it possible +to combine sections, add equations, or change the order of figures or +citations without having to go through the file line by line. + +Please don't use the \verb|{eqnarray}| equation environment. Use +\verb|{align}| or \verb|{IEEEeqnarray}| instead. The \verb|{eqnarray}| +environment leaves unsightly spaces around relation symbols. + +Please note that the \verb|{subequations}| environment in {\LaTeX} +will increment the main equation counter even when there are no +equation numbers displayed. If you forget that, you might write an +article in which the equation numbers skip from (17) to (20), causing +the copy editors to wonder if you've discovered a new method of +counting. + +{\BibTeX} does not work by magic. It doesn't get the bibliographic +data from thin air but from .bib files. If you use {\BibTeX} to produce a +bibliography you must send either the .bbl file or the .bib files. +If you use \texttt{biblatex}, please send the .bib file. The .bbl file +generated by \texttt{biblatex} is not designed to be edited. + +{\LaTeX} can't read your mind. If you assign the same label to a +subsubsection and a table, you might find that Table I has been cross +referenced as Table IV-B3. + +{\LaTeX} does not have precognitive abilities. If you put a +\verb|\label| command before the command that updates the counter it's +supposed to be using, the label will pick up the last counter to be +cross referenced instead. In particular, a \verb|\label| command +should not go before the caption of a figure or a table. + +Do not use \verb|\nonumber| or \verb|\notag| inside the \verb|{array}| environment. It +will not stop equation numbers inside \verb|{array}| (there won't be +any anyway) and it might stop a wanted equation number in the +surrounding equation. + +\section{UNITS} +Use either SI (MKS) or CGS as primary units. (SI units are strongly +encouraged.) English units may be used as secondary units (in parentheses). +This applies to papers in data storage. For example, write ``15 Gb/cm$^{2}$ +(100 Gb/in$^{2})$.'' An exception is when English units are used as +identifiers in trade, such as ``3\textonehalf -in disk drive.'' Avoid +combining SI and CGS units, such as current in amperes and magnetic field in +oersteds. This often leads to confusion because equations do not balance +dimensionally. If you must use mixed units, clearly state the units for each +quantity in an equation. + +The SI unit for magnetic field strength $H$ is A/m. However, if you wish to use +units of T, either refer to magnetic flux density $B$ or magnetic field +strength symbolized as \textmu $_{0}H$. Use the center dot to separate +compound units, e.g., ``A\textbullet m$^{2}$.'' + +\section{SOME COMMON MISTAKES} +The word ``data'' is plural, not singular. The subscript for the +permeability of vacuum \textmu $_{0}$ is zero, not a lowercase letter ``o.'' +The term for residual magnetization is ``remanence''; the adjective is +``remanent''; do not write ``remnance'' or ``remnant.'' Use the word +``micrometer'' instead of ``micron.'' A graph within a graph is an +``inset,'' not an ``insert.'' The word ``alternatively'' is preferred to the +word ``alternately'' (unless you really mean something that alternates). Use +the word ``whereas'' instead of ``while'' (unless you are referring to +simultaneous events). Do not use the word ``essentially'' to mean +``approximately'' or ``effectively.'' Do not use the word ``issue'' as a +euphemism for ``problem.'' When compositions are not specified, separate +chemical symbols by en-dashes; for example, ``NiMn'' indicates the +intermetallic compound Ni$_{0.5}$Mn$_{0.5}$ whereas ``Ni--Mn'' indicates an +alloy of some composition Ni$_{x}$Mn$_{1-x}$. + +Be aware of the different meanings of the homophones ``affect'' (usually a +verb) and ``effect'' (usually a noun), ``complement'' and ``compliment,'' +``discreet'' and ``discrete,'' +``principal'' (e.g., ``principal investigator'') and ``principle'' +(e.g., ``principle of measurement''). Do not confuse ``imply'' and +``infer.'' + +Prefixes such as ``non,'' ``sub,'' ``micro,'' ``multi,'' and ``ultra'' are +not independent words; they should be joined to the words they modify, +usually without a hyphen. There is no period after the ``et'' in the Latin +abbreviation ``\textit{et al.}'' (it is also italicized). The abbreviation ``i.e.,'' means +``that is,'' and the abbreviation ``e.g.,'' means ``for example'' (these +abbreviations are not italicized). + +A general IEEE styleguide is available at www.ieee.org/\break authortools. + +\section{GUIDELINES FOR GRAPHICS PREPARATION +AND SUBMISSION} +\subsection{TYPES OF GRAPHICS} +The following list outlines the different types of graphics published in +IEEE journals. They are categorized based on their construction, and use of +color / shades of gray: + +\subsubsection{Color/Grayscale Figures} +Figures that are meant to appear in color, or shades of black/gray. Such +figures may include photographs, illustrations, multicolor graphs, and +flowcharts. + +\subsubsection{Line Art Figures} +Figures that are composed of only black lines and shapes. These figures +should have no shades or half-tones of gray, only black and white. + +\subsubsection{Author Photos} +Head and shoulders shots of authors that appear at the end of our papers. + +\subsubsection{Tables} +Data charts which are typically black and white, but sometimes include +color. + +\begin{table} +\caption{Units for Magnetic Properties} +\label{table} +\setlength{\tabcolsep}{3pt} +\begin{tabular}{|p{25pt}|p{75pt}|p{115pt}|} +\hline +Symbol& +Quantity& +Conversion from Gaussian and \par CGS EMU to SI $^{\mathrm{a}}$ \\ +\hline +$\Phi $& +magnetic flux& +1 Mx $\to 10^{-8}$ Wb $= 10^{-8}$ V$\cdot $s \\ +$B$& +magnetic flux density, \par magnetic induction& +1 G $\to 10^{-4}$ T $= 10^{-4}$ Wb/m$^{2}$ \\ +$H$& +magnetic field strength& +1 Oe $\to 10^{3}/(4\pi )$ A/m \\ +$m$& +magnetic moment& +1 erg/G $=$ 1 emu \par $\to 10^{-3}$ A$\cdot $m$^{2} = 10^{-3}$ J/T \\ +$M$& +magnetization& +1 erg/(G$\cdot $cm$^{3}) =$ 1 emu/cm$^{3}$ \par $\to 10^{3}$ A/m \\ +4$\pi M$& +magnetization& +1 G $\to 10^{3}/(4\pi )$ A/m \\ +$\sigma $& +specific magnetization& +1 erg/(G$\cdot $g) $=$ 1 emu/g $\to $ 1 A$\cdot $m$^{2}$/kg \\ +$j$& +magnetic dipole \par moment& +1 erg/G $=$ 1 emu \par $\to 4\pi \times 10^{-10}$ Wb$\cdot $m \\ +$J$& +magnetic polarization& +1 erg/(G$\cdot $cm$^{3}) =$ 1 emu/cm$^{3}$ \par $\to 4\pi \times 10^{-4}$ T \\ +$\chi , \kappa $& +susceptibility& +1 $\to 4\pi $ \\ +$\chi_{\rho }$& +mass susceptibility& +1 cm$^{3}$/g $\to 4\pi \times 10^{-3}$ m$^{3}$/kg \\ +$\mu $& +permeability& +1 $\to 4\pi \times 10^{-7}$ H/m \par $= 4\pi \times 10^{-7}$ Wb/(A$\cdot $m) \\ +$\mu_{r}$& +relative permeability& +$\mu \to \mu_{r}$ \\ +$w, W$& +energy density& +1 erg/cm$^{3} \to 10^{-1}$ J/m$^{3}$ \\ +$N, D$& +demagnetizing factor& +1 $\to 1/(4\pi )$ \\ +\hline +\multicolumn{3}{p{251pt}}{Vertical lines are optional in tables. Statements that serve as captions for +the entire table do not need footnote letters. }\\ +\multicolumn{3}{p{251pt}}{$^{\mathrm{a}}$Gaussian units are the same as cg emu for magnetostatics; Mx +$=$ maxwell, G $=$ gauss, Oe $=$ oersted; Wb $=$ weber, V $=$ volt, s $=$ +second, T $=$ tesla, m $=$ meter, A $=$ ampere, J $=$ joule, kg $=$ +kilogram, H $=$ henry.} +\end{tabular} +\label{tab1} +\end{table} + +\begin{figure} +\centerline{\includegraphics[width=3.5in]{fig1}} +\caption{Magnetization as a function of applied field. Note that ``Fig.'' +is abbreviated. There is a period after the figure number, followed by two +spaces. It is good practice to explain the significance of the figure in the +caption.\label{fig1}} +\end{figure} + +\subsection{MULTIPART FIGURES} +Figures compiled of more than one sub-figure presented side-by-side, or +stacked. If a multipart figure is made up of multiple figure types (one part +is lineart, and another is grayscale or color) the figure should meet the +stricter guidelines. + +\subsection{FILE FORMATS FOR GRAPHICS} +Format and save your graphics using a suitable graphics processing program +that will allow you to create the images as PostScript (PS), Encapsulated +PostScript (.EPS), Tagged Image File Format (.TIFF), Portable Document +Format (.PDF), or Portable Network Graphics (.PNG) sizes them, and adjusts +the resolution settings. If you created your source files in one of the +following programs you will be able to submit the graphics without +converting to a PS, EPS, TIFF, PDF, or PNG file: Microsoft Word, Microsoft +PowerPoint, or Microsoft Excel. Though it is not required, it is strongly +recommended that these files be saved in PDF format rather than DOC, XLS, or +PPT. Doing so will protect your figures from common font and arrow stroke +issues that occur when working on the files across multiple platforms. When +submitting your final paper, your graphics should all be submitted +individually in one of these formats along with the manuscript. + +\subsection{SIZING OF GRAPHICS} +Most charts, graphs, and tables are one column wide (3.5 inches / 88 +millimeters / 21 picas) or page wide (7.16 inches / 181 millimeters / 43 +picas). The maximum depth a graphic can be is 8.5 inches (216 millimeters / +54 picas). When choosing the depth of a graphic, please allow space for a +caption. Figures can be sized between column and page widths if the author +chooses, however it is recommended that figures are not sized less than +column width unless when necessary. + +There is currently one publication with column measurements that do not +coincide with those listed above. Proceedings of the IEEE has a column +measurement of 3.25 inches (82.5 millimeters / 19.5 picas). + +The final printed size of author photographs is exactly +1 inch wide by 1.25 inches tall (25.4 millimeters x 31.75 millimeters / 6 +picas x 7.5 picas). Author photos printed in editorials measure 1.59 inches +wide by 2 inches tall (40 millimeters x 50 millimeters / 9.5 picas x 12 +picas). + +\subsection{RESOLUTION} +The proper resolution of your figures will depend on the type of figure it +is as defined in the ``Types of Figures'' section. Author photographs, +color, and grayscale figures should be at least 300dpi. Line art, including +tables should be a minimum of 600dpi. + +\subsection{VECTOR ART} +In order to preserve the figures' integrity across multiple computer +platforms, we accept files in the following formats: .EPS/.PDF/.PS. All +fonts must be embedded or text converted to outlines in order to achieve the +best-quality results. + +\subsection{COLOR SPACE} +The term color space refers to the entire sum of colors that can be +represented within the said medium. For our purposes, the three main color +spaces are Grayscale, RGB (red/green/blue) and CMYK +(cyan/magenta/yellow/black). RGB is generally used with on-screen graphics, +whereas CMYK is used for printing purposes. + +All color figures should be generated in RGB or CMYK color space. Grayscale +images should be submitted in Grayscale color space. Line art may be +provided in grayscale OR bitmap colorspace. Note that ``bitmap colorspace'' +and ``bitmap file format'' are not the same thing. When bitmap color space +is selected, .TIF/.TIFF/.PNG are the recommended file formats. + +\subsection{ACCEPTED FONTS WITHIN FIGURES} +When preparing your graphics IEEE suggests that you use of one of the +following Open Type fonts: Times New Roman, Helvetica, Arial, Cambria, and +Symbol. If you are supplying EPS, PS, or PDF files all fonts must be +embedded. Some fonts may only be native to your operating system; without +the fonts embedded, parts of the graphic may be distorted or missing. + +A safe option when finalizing your figures is to strip out the fonts before +you save the files, creating ``outline'' type. This converts fonts to +artwork what will appear uniformly on any screen. + +\subsection{USING LABELS WITHIN FIGURES} +\subsubsection{Figure Axis Labels} +Figure axis labels are often a source of confusion. Use words rather than +symbols. As an example, write the quantity ``Magnetization,'' or +``Magnetization $M$,'' not just ``$M$.'' Put units in parentheses. Do not label +axes only with units. As in Fig. 1, for example, write ``Magnetization +(A/m)'' or ``Magnetization (A$\cdot $m$^{-1})$,'' not just ``A/m.'' Do not +label axes with a ratio of quantities and units. For example, write +``Temperature (K),'' not ``Temperature/K.'' + +Multipliers can be especially confusing. Write ``Magnetization (kA/m)'' or +``Magnetization (10$^{3}$ A/m).'' Do not write ``Magnetization (A/m) +\texttimes 1000'' because the reader would not know whether the top axis +label in Fig. 1 meant 16000 A/m or 0.016 A/m. Figure labels should be +legible, approximately 8 to 10 point type. + +\subsubsection{Subfigure Labels in Multipart Figures and Tables} +Multipart figures should be combined and labeled before final submission. +Labels should appear centered below each subfigure in 8 point Times New +Roman font in the format of (a) (b) (c). + +\subsection{FILE NAMING} +Figures (line artwork or photographs) should be named starting with the +first 5 letters of the author's last name. The next characters in the +filename should be the number that represents the sequential location of +this image in your article. For example, in author ``Anderson's'' paper, the +first three figures would be named ander1.tif, ander2.tif, and ander3.ps. + +Tables should contain only the body of the table (not the caption) and +should be named similarly to figures, except that `.t' is inserted +in-between the author's name and the table number. For example, author +Anderson's first three tables would be named ander.t1.tif, ander.t2.ps, +ander.t3.eps. + +Author photographs should be named using the first five characters of the +pictured author's last name. For example, four author photographs for a +paper may be named: oppen.ps, moshc.tif, chen.eps, and duran.pdf. + +If two authors or more have the same last name, their first initial(s) can +be substituted for the fifth, fourth, third\textellipsis letters of their surname +until the degree where there is differentiation. For example, two authors +Michael and Monica Oppenheimer's photos would be named oppmi.tif, and +oppmo.eps. + +\subsection{REFERENCING A FIGURE OR TABLE WITHIN YOUR PAPER} +When referencing your figures and tables within your paper, use the +abbreviation ``Fig.'' even at the beginning of a sentence. Do not abbreviate +``Table.'' Tables should be numbered with Roman Numerals. + +\subsection{CHECKING YOUR FIGURES: THE IEEE GRAPHICS ANALYZER} +The IEEE Graphics Analyzer enables authors to pre-screen their graphics for +compliance with IEEE Open Journals standards before submission. The online +tool, located at \underline {http://graphicsqc.ieee.org/}, allows authors to +upload their graphics in order to check that each file is the correct file +format, resolution, size and colorspace; that no fonts are missing or +corrupt; that figures are not compiled in layers or have transparency, and +that they are named according to the IEEE Open Journals naming convention. +At the end of this automated process, authors are provided with a detailed +report on each graphic within the web applet, as well as by email. + +For more information on using the Graphics Analyzer +or any other graphics related topic, contact the IEEE Graphics Help Desk by +e-mail at \underline {graphics@ieee.org}. + +\subsection{SUBMITTING YOUR GRAPHICS} +Because IEEE will do the final formatting of your paper, +you do not need to position figures and tables at the top and bottom of each +column. In fact, all figures, figure captions, and tables can be placed at +the end of your paper. In addition to, or even in lieu of submitting figures +within your final manuscript, figures should be submitted individually, +separate from the manuscript in one of the file formats listed above in +section VI-J. Place figure captions below the figures; place table titles +above the tables. Please do not include captions as part of the figures, or +put them in ``text boxes'' linked to the figures. Also, do not place borders +around the outside of your figures. + +\subsection{COLOR PROCESSING / PRINTING IN IEEE JOURNALS} +All IEEE Transactions, Journals, and Letters allow an author to publish +color figures on IEEE \textit{Xplore}{\textregistered} at no charge, and automatically +convert them to grayscale for print versions. In most journals, figures and +tables may alternatively be printed in color if an author chooses to do so. +Please note that this service comes at an extra expense to the author. If +you intend to have print color graphics, include a note with your final +paper indicating which figures or tables you would like to be handled that +way, and stating that you are willing to pay the additional fee. + +\section{CONCLUSION} +A conclusion section is not required. Although a conclusion may review the +main points of the paper, do not replicate the abstract as the conclusion. A +conclusion might elaborate on the importance of the work or suggest +applications and extensions. + +\section*{APPENDIX} +Appendixes, if needed, appear before the acknowledgment. + +\section*{ACKNOWLEDGMENT} +The preferred spelling of the word ``acknowledgment'' in American English is +without an ``e'' after the ``g.'' Use the singular heading even if you have +many acknowledgments. Avoid expressions such as ``One of us (S.B.A.) would +like to thank \textellipsis .'' Instead, write ``F. A. Author thanks \textellipsis .'' In most +cases, sponsor and financial support acknowledgments are placed in the +unnumbered footnote on the first page, not here. + +\section*{REFERENCES AND FOOTNOTES} +\subsection{REFERENCES} +References need not be cited in text. When they are, they appear on the +line, in square brackets, inside the punctuation. Multiple references are +each numbered with separate brackets. When citing a section in a book, +please give the relevant page numbers. In text, refer simply to the +reference number. Do not use ``Ref.'' or ``reference'' except at the +beginning of a sentence: ``Reference [3] shows \textellipsis .'' Please do not use +automatic endnotes in \textit{Word}, rather, type the reference list at the end of the +paper using the ``References'' style. + +Reference numbers are set flush left and form a column of their own, hanging +out beyond the body of the reference. The reference numbers are on the line, +enclosed in square brackets. In all references, the given name of the author +or editor is abbreviated to the initial only and precedes the last name. Use +them all; use \textit{et al}. only if names are not given. Use commas around Jr., Sr., and +III in names. Abbreviate conference titles. When citing IEEE transactions, +provide the issue number, page range, volume number, year, and/or month if +available. When referencing a patent, provide the day and the month of +issue, or application. References may not include all information; please +obtain and include relevant information. Do not combine references. There +must be only one reference with each number. If there is a URL included with +the print reference, it can be included at the end of the reference. + +Other than books, capitalize only the first word in a paper title, except +for proper nouns and element symbols. For papers published in translation +journals, please give the English citation first, followed by the original +foreign-language citation See the end of this document for formats and +examples of common references. For a complete discussion of references and +their formats, see the IEEE style manual at www.ieee.org/authortools. + + +\subsection{FOOTNOTES} +Number footnotes separately in superscripts (Insert\textbar +Footnote).\footnote{It is recommended that footnotes be avoided (except for +the unnumbered footnote with the receipt date on the first page). Instead, +try to integrate the footnote information into the text.} Place the actual +footnote at the bottom of the column in which it is cited; do not put +footnotes in the reference list (endnotes). Use letters for table footnotes +(see Table I). + +\section{SUBMITTING YOUR PAPER FOR REVIEW} + +\subsection{FINAL Stage} +When you submit your final version (after your paper has been accepted), +print it in two-column format, including figures and tables. You must also +send your final manuscript on a disk, via e-mail, or through a Web +manuscript submission system as directed by the society contact. You may use +\textit{Zip} for large files, or compress files using \textit{Compress, Pkzip, Stuffit,} or \textit{Gzip.} + +Also, send a sheet of paper or PDF with complete contact information for all +authors. Include full mailing addresses, telephone numbers, fax numbers, and +e-mail addresses. This information will be used to send each author a +complimentary copy of the journal in which the paper appears. In addition, +designate one author as the ``corresponding author.'' This is the author to +whom proofs of the paper will be sent. Proofs are sent to the corresponding +author only. + +\subsection{REVIEW STAGE USING SCHOLARONE{\textregistered} MANUSCRIPTS} +Contributions to the Transactions, Journals, and Letters may be submitted +electronically on IEEE's on-line manuscript submission and peer-review +system, ScholarOne{\textregistered} Manuscripts. You can get a +listing of the publications that participate in ScholarOne at +http://www.ieee.org/\discretionary{}{}{}publications\textunderscore +standards/publications/authors/authors\textunderscore\break submission.html First +check if you have an existing account. If there is none, please create a new +account. After logging in, go to your Author Center and click ``Submit First +Draft of a New Manuscript.'' + +Along with other information, you will be asked to select the subject from a +pull-down list. Depending on the journal, there are various steps to the +submission process; you must complete all steps for a complete submission. +At the end of each step you must click ``Save and Continue''; just uploading +the paper is not sufficient. After the last step, you should see a +confirmation that the submission is complete. You should also receive an +e-mail confirmation. For inquiries regarding the submission of your paper on +ScholarOne Manuscripts, please contact oprs-support@ieee.org or call +1 +732 465 5861. + +ScholarOne Manuscripts will accept files for review in various formats. +Please check the guidelines of the specific journal for which you plan to +submit. + +You will be asked to file an electronic copyright form immediately upon +completing the submission process (authors are responsible for obtaining any +security clearances). Failure to submit the electronic copyright could +result in publishing delays later. You will also have the opportunity to +designate your article as ``open access'' if you agree to pay the IEEE open +access fee. + +\subsection{FINAL STAGE USING SCHOLARONE MANUSCRIPTS} +Upon acceptance, you will receive an email with specific instructions +regarding the submission of your final files. To avoid any delays in +publication, please be sure to follow these instructions. Most journals +require that final submissions be uploaded through ScholarOne Manuscripts, +although some may still accept final submissions via email. Final +submissions should include source files of your accepted manuscript, high +quality graphic files, and a formatted pdf file. If you have any questions +regarding the final submission process, please contact the administrative +contact for the journal. + +In addition to this, upload a file with complete contact information for all +authors. Include full mailing addresses, telephone numbers, fax numbers, and +e-mail addresses. Designate the author who submitted the manuscript on +ScholarOne Manuscripts as the ``corresponding author.'' This is the only +author to whom proofs of the paper will be sent. + +\subsection{COPYRIGHT FORM} +Authors must submit an electronic IEEE Copyright Form (eCF) upon submitting +their final manuscript files. You can access the eCF system through your +manuscript submission system or through the Author Gateway. You are +responsible for obtaining any necessary approvals and/or security +clearances. For additional information on intellectual property rights, +visit the IEEE Intellectual Property Rights department web page at +http://www.ieee.org/publications\textunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}standards/publications/rights/index.html. + +\section{IEEE PUBLISHING POLICY} +The general IEEE policy requires that authors should only submit original +work that has neither appeared elsewhere for publication, nor is under +review for another refereed publication. The submitting author must disclose +all prior publication(s) and current submissions when submitting a +manuscript. Do not publish ``preliminary'' data or results. The submitting +author is responsible for obtaining agreement of all coauthors and any +consent required from employers or sponsors before submitting an article. +The IEEE Open Journals Department strongly discourages courtesy authorship; +it is the obligation of the authors to cite only relevant prior work. + +The IEEE Open Journals Department does not publish conference records or +proceedings, but can publish articles related to conferences that have +undergone rigorous peer review. Minimally, two reviews are required for +every article submitted for peer review. + +\section{PUBLICATION PRINCIPLES} +The two types of contents of that are published are; 1) peer-reviewed and 2) +archival. The Transactions and Journals Department publishes scholarly +articles of archival value as well as tutorial expositions and critical +reviews of classical subjects and topics of current interest. + +Authors should consider the following points: + +\begin{enumerate} +\item Technical papers submitted for publication must advance the state of knowledge and must cite relevant prior work. +\item The length of a submitted paper should be commensurate with the importance, or appropriate to the complexity, of the work. For example, an obvious extension of previously published work might not be appropriate for publication or might be adequately treated in just a few pages. +\item Authors must convince both peer reviewers and the editors of the scientific and technical merit of a paper; the standards of proof are higher when extraordinary or unexpected results are reported. +\item Because replication is required for scientific progress, papers submitted for publication must provide sufficient information to allow readers to perform similar experiments or calculations and use the reported results. Although not everything need be disclosed, a paper must contain new, useable, and fully described information. For example, a specimen's chemical composition need not be reported if the main purpose of a paper is to introduce a new measurement technique. Authors should expect to be challenged by reviewers if the results are not supported by adequate data and critical details. +\item Papers that describe ongoing work or announce the latest technical achievement, which are suitable for presentation at a professional conference, may not be appropriate for publication. +\end{enumerate} + +\section*{REFERENCES} + +\def\refname{\vadjust{\vspace*{-1em}}} %Please don't do this in a real paper. + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for books:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b1} J. K. Author, ``Title of chapter in the book,'' in \textit{Title of His Published Book, x}th ed. City of Publisher, +(only U.S. State), Country: Abbrev. of Publisher, year, ch. x, sec. x, pp. +\textit{xxx--xxx.} +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Examples:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b2} G. O. Young, ``Synthetic structure of industrial +plastics,'' in \emph{Plastics}, 2nd ed., vol. 3, J. Peters, Ed. New York, NY, USA: McGraw-Hill, 1964, pp. 15--64. +\bibitem{b3} W.-K. Chen, \emph{Linear Networks and Systems}. Belmont, CA, USA: Wadsworth, 1993, pp. 123--135. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for periodicals:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b4} J. K. Author, ``Name of paper,'' \textit{Abbrev. Title of Periodical}, vol. x, no. x, pp. xxx-xxx, Abbrev. Month, year, DOI. +10.1109.\textit{XXX}.123456. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Examples:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b5} J. U. Duncombe, ``Infrared navigation---Part I: An +assessment of feasibility,'' \emph{IEEE Trans. Electron Devices}, vol. ED-11, no. 1, pp. 34--39, Jan. 1959, 10.1109/TED.2016.2628402. +\bibitem{b6} E. P. Wigner, ``Theory of traveling-wave optical laser,'' +\emph{Phys. Rev.}, vol. 134, pp. A635--A646, Dec. 1965. +\bibitem{b7} E. H. Miller, ``A note on reflector arrays,'' \emph{IEEE +Trans. Antennas Propagat.}, to be published. +\bibitem{b8} H. Qin, Y. Cui, Z. Wu, Q. Chen and D. Xing, "Real-Time +Thermoacoustic Imaging-Guidance for Breast Tumor Resection," \emph{IEEE Photonics Journal}, vol. 12, no. 3, pp. 1--7, June 2020, Art no. 3700207. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for reports:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b9} J. K. Author, ``Title of report,'' Abbrev. Name of Co., City of Co., Abbrev. +State, Country, Rep. {xxx}, year. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Examples:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b10} E. E. Reber, R. L. Michell, and C. J. Carter, ``Oxygen absorption in the earth's atmosphere,'' Aerospace Corp., Los Angeles, CA, USA, Tech. Rep. TR-0200 (4230-46)-3, Nov. 1988. +\bibitem{b11} J. H. Davis and J. R. Cogdell, ``Calibration program for the 16-foot antenna,'' Elect. Eng. Res. Lab., Univ. Texas, Austin, TX, USA, Tech. Memo. NGL-006-69-3, Nov. 15, 1987. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for handbooks:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b12} \textit{Name of Manual/Handbook}, x ed., Abbrev. Name of Co., City of Co., Abbrev. State, Country, year, pp. +\textit{xxx-xxx.} +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Examples:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b13} \textit{Transmission Systems for Communications}, 3rd ed., Western Electric Co., Winston-Salem, NC, USA, 1985, pp. 44--60. +\bibitem{b14} \textit{Motorola Semiconductor Data Manual}, Motorola Semiconductor Products Inc., Phoenix, AZ, USA, 1989. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for books (when available online): } + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b15} J. K. Author, ``Title of chapter in the book,'' in \textit{Title of Published Book}, xth ed. City of +Publisher, State, Country: Abbrev. of Publisher, year, ch. x, sec. x, pp. +\textit{xxx--xxx}. [Online]. Available: \underline {http://www.web.com}. Accessed on: Month +Day, Year. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Examples:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b16} G. O. Young, ``Synthetic structure of industrial +plastics,'' in \emph{Plastics}, vol. 3, Polymers of Hexadromicon, J. +Peters, Ed., 2nd ed. New York, NY, USA: McGraw-Hill, 1964, pp. 15--64. +[Online]. Available: \underline{http://www.bookref.com}. Accessed on: April 25, 2020. +\bibitem{b17} \textit{The Founders' Constitution}, Philip B. Kurland and Ralph Lerner, eds., Chicago, IL, USA: Univ. Chicago Press, 1987. [Online]. Available: \underline {http://press-pubs.uchicago.edu/founders/}. Accessed on: April 25, 2020. +\bibitem{b18} \emph{The Terahertz Wave eBook}. ZOmega Terahertz +Corp., 2014. [Online]. Available: \underline{http://dl.z-thz.com/eBook/zomega\_ebook\_pdf\_1206\_sr.pdf}. Accessed on: May 19, 2014. +\bibitem{b19} Philip B. Kurland and Ralph Lerner, eds., \textit{The +Founders' Constitution. }Chicago, IL, USA: Univ. of Chicago Press, 1987, [Online] Available: \emph{http://press-pubs.uchicago.edu/founders/}. Accessed on: Feb. 28, 2010. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for conference proceedings (published):} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b20} J. K. Author, ``Title of paper,'' in \textit{Abbreviated Name of Conf.}, City of Conf., Abbrev. State (if +given), Country, year, pp. \textit{xxxxxx.} +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Example:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b21} D. B. Payne and J. R. Stern, ``Wavelength-switched +passively coupled single-mode optical network,'' in \textit{Proc. IOOC-ECOC, }Boston, MA, USA, 1985,~pp.~585--590. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for papers presented at conferences when available online: } + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b22} J.K. Author. (year, month). Title. presented at abbrev. conference title. +[Type of Medium]. Available: \underline{site/path/file}. Accessed on: Month Day, Year. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Example:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b23} PROCESS Corporation, Boston, MA, USA. Intranets: Internet technologies deployed behind the firewall for corporate productivity. Presented at INET96 Annual Meeting. [Online]. Available: \underline {http://home.process.com/Intranets/wp2.htp}. Accessed on: April 25, 2020. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for reports and handbooks (when available online): } + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b24} J. K. Author. ``Title of report,'' Company. City, State, Country. Rep. no., +(optional: vol./issue), Date. [Online] Available: +\underline{site/path/file}. Accessed +on: Month Day, Year. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Examples:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b25} R. J. Hijmans and J. van Etten, ``Raster: Geographic analysis and modeling with raster data,'' R Package Version 2.0-12, Jan. 12, 2012. [Online]. Available: \underline {http://CRAN.R-project.org/package=raster}. Accessed on: April 25, 2020. +\bibitem{b26} Teralyzer. Lytera UG, Kirchhain, Germany [Online]. Available: \emph{http://www.lytera.de/Terahertz\_THz\_Spectroscopy.php?id=home}, Accessed on: Jun. 5, 2014 +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for computer programs and electronic documents (when available online): } + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b27} Legislative body. Number of Congress, Session. (year, month day). \textit{Number of bill or resolution}, \textit{Title}. [Type +of medium]. Available: \underline{site/path/file} +\end{thebibliography} + +{\bfseries\itshape NOTE:} ISO recommends that capitalization follow the +accepted practice for the language or script in which the information is +given. + +\subsubsection*{Example:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b28} U.S. House. 102nd Congress, 1st Session. (1991, Jan. 11). \textit{H. Con. Res. 1, Sense of the Congress on Approval of Military Action}. [Online]. Available: LEXIS Library: GENFED File: BILLS +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for patents (when available online):} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b29} Name of the invention, by inventor's name. (year, month day). Patent Number [Type +of medium]. Available: \underline{site/path/file} +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Example:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b30} Musical toothbrush with mirror, by L.M.R. Brooks. (1992, May 19). Patent D 326 189 [Online]. Available: NEXIS Library: LEXPAT File: DES +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Example for papers presented at conferences (unpublished):} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b31} D. Ebehard and E. Voges, ``Digital single sideband +detection for interferometric sensors,'' presented at the \textit{2nd Int. Conf. Optical Fiber Sensors,} Stuttgart, Germany, Jan. 2--5, 1984. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for patents:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b32} J. K. Author, ``Title of patent,'' U.S. Patent {x xxx xxx}, Abbrev. Month, day, year. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Example:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b33} G. Brandli and M. Dick, ``Alternating current fed power supply,'' U.S. Patent 4 084 217, Nov. 4, 1978. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for theses (M.S.) and dissertations (Ph.D.):} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b34} J. K. Author, ``Title of thesis,'' M.S. thesis, Abbrev. Dept., Abbrev. +Univ., City of Univ., Abbrev. State, year. p. nnn. +\bibitem{b35} J. K. Author, ``Title of dissertation,'' Ph.D. dissertation, Abbrev. +Dept., Abbrev. Univ., City of Univ., Abbrev. State, year. p. nnn. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Examples:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b36} J. O. Williams, ``Narrow-band analyzer,'' Ph.D. dissertation, Dept. Elect. Eng., Harvard Univ., Cambridge, MA, USA, 1993. p. 50. +\bibitem{b37} N. Kawasaki, ``Parametric study of thermal and chemical nonequilibrium nozzle flow,'' M.S. thesis, Dept. Electron. Eng., Osaka Univ., Osaka, Japan, 1993. p. 30. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic format for the most common types of unpublished references:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b38} J. K. Author, private communication, Abbrev. Month, year. +\bibitem{b39} J. K. Author, ``Title of paper,'' unpublished. +\bibitem{b40} J. K. Author, ``Title of paper,'' to be published. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Examples:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b41} A. Harrison, private communication, May 1995. +\bibitem{b42} B. Smith, ``An approach to graphs of linear forms,'' unpublished. +\bibitem{b43} A. Brahms, ``Representation error for real numbers in binary computer arithmetic,'' IEEE Computer Group Repository, Paper R-67-85. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Basic formats for standards:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b44} \textit{Title of Standard}, Standard number, date. +\bibitem{b45} \textit{Title of Standard}, Standard number, Corporate author, location, date. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Examples:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b46} \emph{IEEE Criteria for Class IE Electric Systems}, IEEE Standard 308, 1969. +\bibitem{b47} \emph{Letter Symbols for Quantities}, ANSI Standard Y10.5-1968. +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Article number in~reference examples:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b48} R. Fardel, M. Nagel, F. Nuesch, T. Lippert, and A. Wokaun, ``Fabrication of organic light emitting diode pixels by laser-assisted forward transfer,'' \textit{Appl. Phys. Lett.}, vol. 91, no. 6, Aug. 2007, Art. no. 061103. +\bibitem{b49} J. Zhang and N. Tansu, ``Optical gain and laser characteristics of InGaN quantum wells on ternary InGaN substrates,'' \textit{IEEE Photon. J.}, vol. 5, no. 2, Apr. 2013, Art. no. 2600111 +\end{thebibliography} + +\subsubsection*{Example when using et al.:} + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b50} S. Azodolmolky, Jordi Perell\'{o}, Marianna Angelou, Fernando Agraz, Luis Velasco, Salvatore Spadaro,~\textit{et al.}, Experimental demonstration of an impairment aware network planning and operation tool for transparent/translucent optical networks,''~\textit{J. Lightwave. Technol.}, vol. 29, no. 4, pp. 439--448, Sep. 2011. +\end{thebibliography} + +\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{a1.png}}]{FIRST +A. AUTHOR } (Fellow, IEEE) and all authors may include +biographies. Biographies are often not included in conference-related +papers. This author became a Member (M) of IEEE in 1976, a Senior +Member (SM) in 1981, and a Fellow (F) in 1987. The first paragraph may +contain a place and/or date of birth (list place, then date). Next, +the author's educational background is listed. The degrees should be +listed with type of degree in what field, which institution, city, +state, and country, and year the degree was earned. The author's major +field of study should be lower-cased. + +The second paragraph uses the pronoun of the person (he or she) and not the +author's last name. It lists military and work experience, including summer +and fellowship jobs. Job titles are capitalized. The current job must have a +location; previous positions may be listed +without one. Information concerning previous publications may be included. +Try not to list more than three books or published articles. The format for +listing publishers of a book within the biography is: title of book +(publisher name, year) similar to a reference. Current and previous research +interests end the paragraph. The third paragraph begins with the author's +title and last name (e.g., Dr.\ Smith, Prof.\ Jones, Mr.\ Kajor, Ms.\ Hunter). +List any memberships in professional societies other than the IEEE. Finally, +list any awards and work for IEEE committees and publications. If a +photograph is provided, it should be of good quality, and +professional-looking. Following are two examples of an author's biography. +\end{IEEEbiography} + +\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{a2.png}}]{SECOND +B. AUTHOR } was born in Greenwich Village, New York, NY, USA in +1977. He received the B.S. and M.S. degrees in aerospace engineering from +the University of Virginia, Charlottesville, in 2001 and the Ph.D. degree in +mechanical engineering from Drexel University, Philadelphia, PA, in 2008. + +From 2001 to 2004, he was a Research Assistant with the Princeton Plasma +Physics Laboratory. Since 2009, he has been an Assistant Professor with the +Mechanical Engineering Department, Texas A{\&}M University, College Station. +He is the author of three books, more than 150 articles, and more than 70 +inventions. His research interests include high-pressure and high-density +nonthermal plasma discharge processes and applications, microscale plasma +discharges, discharges in liquids, spectroscopic diagnostics, plasma +propulsion, and innovation plasma applications. He is an Associate Editor of +the journal \emph{Earth, Moon, Planets}, and holds two patents. + +Dr. Author was a recipient of the International Association of Geomagnetism +and Aeronomy Young Scientist Award for Excellence in 2008, and the IEEE +Electromagnetic Compatibility Society Best Symposium Paper Award in 2011. +\end{IEEEbiography} + +\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{a3.png}}]{THIRD +C. AUTHOR,~JR. } (Member, IEEE) received the B.S. degree in mechanical +engineering from National Chung Cheng University, Chiayi, Taiwan, in 2004 +and the M.S. degree in mechanical engineering from National Tsing Hua +University, Hsinchu, Taiwan, in 2006. He is currently pursuing the Ph.D. +degree in mechanical engineering at Texas A{\&}M University, College +Station, TX, USA. + +From 2008 to 2009, he was a Research Assistant with the Institute of +Physics, Academia Sinica, Tapei, Taiwan. His research interest includes the +development of surface processing and biological/medical treatment +techniques using nonthermal atmospheric pressure plasmas, fundamental study +of plasma sources, and fabrication of micro- or nanostructured surfaces. + +Mr. Author's awards and honors include the Frew Fellowship (Australian +Academy of Science), the I. I. Rabi Prize (APS), the European Frequency and +Time Forum Award, the Carl Zeiss Research Award, the William F. Meggers +Award and the Adolph Lomb Medal (OSA). +\end{IEEEbiography} + +\end{document} diff --git a/OJ_Template/ieeeoj.cls b/OJ_Template/ieeeoj.cls new file mode 100644 index 0000000..057c23c --- /dev/null +++ b/OJ_Template/ieeeoj.cls @@ -0,0 +1,5018 @@ +% ===================================================================== +%% IEEEoj.cls 2020/06/19 version V1.0 +%% +%% IEEE Open Journals document class file for LaTeX2e +%% +%% Copyright (C) IEEE Open Journals +%% for LaTeX version 1.0, by Aptara, India +%% +%% IEEEoj.cls is based on IEEEtran.cls version V1.7a. +%% +%% IEEEoj.cls is created to match the design layout of +%% IEEE OJ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Open Journals Acronym %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% %% +%% OJCS IEEE Open Journal of the Computer Society %% +%% %% +%% OJEMB IEEE Open Journal of the Engineering in Medicine and Biology %% +%% %% +%% OJIA IEEE Open Journal of the Industry Applications %% +%% %% +%% OJIES IEEE Open Journal of the Industrial Electronics Society %% +%% %% +%% OJNANO IEEE Open Journal of the Nanotechnology %% +%% %% +%% OJPEL IEEE Open Journal of the Power Electronics %% +%% %% +%% OJSP IEEE Open Journal of the Signal Processing %% +%% %% +%% OJVT IEEE Open Journal of the Vehicular Technology %% +%% %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% +%% ===================================================================== +%% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a +%% +%% +%% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of +%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and +%% conferences. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ +%% +%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes +%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version. +%% +%% +%% Contributors: +%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), +%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), +%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007) +%% +%% +%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, +%% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter, +%% Juergen von Hagen +%% and +%% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell +%% +%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell +%% See: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau +%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command +%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. +%% +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%% +%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex +%% +%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an +%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will +%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA. +%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version +%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls". +%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user, +%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the +%% correct version information. +%% The changes should also be documented via source comments. +%%************************************************************************* +%% +% +% Available class options +% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} +% +% *** choose only one from each category *** +% +% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt +% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt. +% +% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca +% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers, +% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user +% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like +% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for +% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is +% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review +% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will +% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the +% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are +% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like +% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted +% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact +% information can be easily seen on the cover page. +% The default is journal. +% +% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final +% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for +% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version. +% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX +% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows +% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like +% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot +% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably +% also want to select onecolumn. +% The default is final. +% +% letterpaper, a4paper +% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER +% SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS +% WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will +% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer +% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top +% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. +% For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in) +% paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing +% (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document. +% Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins. +% IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex +% (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more +% important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for +% dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the +% testflow documentation +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow +% for more details on dvips paper size configuration. +% The default is letterpaper. +% +% oneside, twoside +% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex) +% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of +% the pages. +% The default is oneside. +% +% onecolumn, twocolumn +% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One +% column mode is usually used only with draft papers. +% The default is twocolumn. +% +% compsoc +% Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society. +% +% romanappendices +% Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls +% now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what +% v1.6b and earlier did. +% +% captionsoff +% disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals +% request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages +% of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat +% package can be used with this class option to achieve this format. +% +% nofonttune +% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those +% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned" +% their fonts. +% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters. +% +% +%---------- +% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted): +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch +% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin +% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin +% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin +% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin +% +% Available CLASSINFOs provided: +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional) +% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro) +% \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro) +% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length) +% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length) +% +% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided: +% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted, +% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +% point size options provided as a single macro: +% \CLASSOPTIONpt +% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's +% normalsize point size. +% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview +% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls + + + + + +\ProvidesClass{IEEEphot}[2009/06/23 V1.2] +\typeout{-- See the "IEEEphot_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + +% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3 +% These values serve as a way a .tex file can +% determine if the new features are provided. +% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from +% these values. i.e., V1.4 +% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that- +% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here) +\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} +\def\IEEEtransversionminor{7} + +% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls +\newif\if@restonecol +\newif\if@titlepage + + +% class option conditionals +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue%false +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue + +\global\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue +\global\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse + + +% class info conditionals + +% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output +\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse + + +% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper +\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse + + + +% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers +% dimen +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +% count +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB +% token list +\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA + +% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs) +% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some +% external packages +\def\@ptsize{0} +% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt +\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}} +\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}} +\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}} +\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}} +% +\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% + \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% + \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{IEEE Photonics PaperSize}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.25in}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{10.75in}} +% +\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% + \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% + \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}} + +\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse + \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse} +\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue + \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse} + +\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse} +\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse} + +% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages +% will go into draft mode. +\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} +% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages +% used by the document. +\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} +% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer. +\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} +\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} + +\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue} + +\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue} + +\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue} + +\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue} + +\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue} + + +% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal +%% \ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal} +\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,twoside,final,journal} +% overrride these defaults per user requests +\ProcessOptions + + + +% Computer Society conditional execution command +\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} +% inverse +\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} +% compsoc conference +\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} +% compsoc not conference +\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} + + +% IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times. +% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package. +\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} +\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} +\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} + +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}} + +% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font, +% not Times Roman. +\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{phvr}} + +% enable Times/Palatino main text font +\normalfont\selectfont + + + + + +% V1.7 conference notice message hook +\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}% +\typeout{** Conference Paper **}% +\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}% +\typeout{}% +\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}% +\typeout{ of your paper;}% +\typeout{}% +\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}% +\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}% +\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}% +\typeout{}} + + +% we can send console reminder messages to the user here +\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi} + + +% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode +%\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else% +% \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else% +% \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}% +% \fi% +%\fi + + +% V1.7 improved paper size setting code. +% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that +% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered, +% even if only effect is to set them to \relax. +% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special +{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{% +% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax +% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput +% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput. +\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth +\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}% +% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special +\ifcase\pdfoutput +\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}% +\else +% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag +\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue +\fi}} + +% let the user know the selected papersize +\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space +(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.} + +\ifCLASSINFOpdf +\typeout{-- Using PDF output.} +\else +\typeout{-- Using DVI output.} +\fi + + +% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{} +% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{}, +% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc. +% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as +% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues +% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}. +% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion. +%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}} +%\def\@journal{} + + + +% pointsize values +% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size +\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9} +\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10} +\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11} +\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12} + + + +% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) +% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and +% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems +% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want +% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading) +% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down) +% 10pt 58 12pt (exact) +% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down) +% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact) +% + +% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size +% in case baselinestretch ever changes. +% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink +\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip + +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine +\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1ex plus3pt minus1pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 1ex plus3pt minus1pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8}{10pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{18}{20pt}} +\fi + + +% Check if we have selected 10 points +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten +\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{12bp}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 5pt plus4pt minus2pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 5pt plus4pt minus2pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8}{12pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{12pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} +% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}\bfseries}%%%% Author Font +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{18}{20pt}}%%%%title font +\fi + + +% Check if we have selected 11 points +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven +\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} +\fi + + +% Check if we have selected 12 points +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve +\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} +\fi + + +% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for +% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution +% tolerance to turn off this warning +\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt} +% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed. + + +% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with +% technote +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else% + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}% + \fi% +\fi + + +% V1.7 +% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with +% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use +% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. +\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family +\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family +\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family +\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family +\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family +\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else +\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax} + + + + +% set the default \baselinestretch +\def\baselinestretch{1} +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes +\fi + + +% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch +\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined +\else + \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to + \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} +\fi + +\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect + + + + +% store the normalsize baselineskip +\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip +\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax +% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip +% we could save a register by giving the user access to +% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect +% its read only internal status +\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax +% store the nominal value of jot +\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot +\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax + +% set \jot +\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax + + + + +% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing +% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a +% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em) +% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%. +% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of: +% +% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt +% +% However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need +% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE +% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words. +% IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be: +% 35% nominal +% 23% minimum +% 50% maximum +% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.) +% +% for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more: +% 37.5% nominal +% 23% minimum +% 55% maximum + +% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use +% for medium (normal weight) +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50} + +% for bold +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} + + +% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: +% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space +% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch +% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink +% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands +% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes +\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{% +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead. +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}} + +% revise the interword spacing for each font weight +\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% +\mdseries +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}% +\bfseries +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}% +}} + +% revise the interword spacing for each font shape +% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are +% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we +% won't alter these either. +\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% +\normalfont +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens +\normalfont\itshape +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens +}} + +% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape +% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a +% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers. +\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily +\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}} + +% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing +% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make +% sure all the default fonts are loaded +\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else +\@IEEEtunefonts +\fi + +% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts +\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi} + + + +% V1.6 +% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations +% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise +% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox +% warning. The author may still have to tweak things, +% but the appearance will be much better "right out +% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. +% TeX default is 50 +\hyphenpenalty=750 +% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. +% The TeX default is 1000 +\hbadness=1350 +% IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation +\frenchspacing + +% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks +\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700 +\relpenalty=800 % default 500 + + +% margin note stuff +\marginparsep 10pt +\marginparwidth 20pt +\marginparpush 25pt + + +% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch +\lineskip 0pt +\normallineskip 0pt +\lineskiplimit 0pt +\normallineskiplimit 0pt + +% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the +% footline +\footskip 42pt%%%0.4in%24pt%in + +% normally zero, should be relative to font height. +% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes) +\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex + +\parindent 10pt + +\topmargin 5pc%-49.0pt +\headheight 12pt +\headsep 0.25in + +% use the normal font baselineskip +% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch +\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\textheight 59pc % 9.63in, 696pt +% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. +% The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used +% to determine these values. +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=57\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page + + +\columnsep 12pt +\textwidth 42pc % 2 x 19pc + 2pc = 40pc + + +% the default side margins are equal +\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper +\oddsidemargin 5pc +\evensidemargin 5pc +\else +\oddsidemargin 0.680in +\evensidemargin 0.680in +\fi +% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset +\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} +\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} + + + +% adjust margins for conference mode +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference + \topmargin -0.25in + % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} + \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt) + % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=57\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 56 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page +\fi + + +% compsoc conference +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference + % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep + \columnsep 0.375in + % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin + \topmargin 0in + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff + % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} + \textheight 8.875in % (641.39625pt) + % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 53 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page + \textwidth 6.5in + % the default side margins are equal + \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper + \oddsidemargin 22.45mm + \evensidemargin 22.45mm + \else + \oddsidemargin 1in + \evensidemargin 1in + \fi + % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset + \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} + \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} +\fi\fi + + + +% draft mode settings override that of all other modes +% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra +% space between the lines for editor's comments +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + % want 1in from top of paper to text + \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}% + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}% + % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type + \oddsidemargin 0in + \evensidemargin 0in + % set the text width + \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}% + \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}% +%% \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}% + \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}% + % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines. + % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad + \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}% + \divide\textheight by \baselineskip% + \multiply\textheight by \baselineskip% + \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}% +\fi + + + +% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin +% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner. +\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} + \fi +\fi + +\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer. + \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} + \fi + \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} + \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside + \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} + \else + \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} + \fi + \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} + \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} + \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth} + \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} + \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and + outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} +\fi + + + +% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin +% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin +\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} + \fi +\fi + +\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin + \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} + \fi + \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in} + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} +%% \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight} + \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} + \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} + % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip + % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need + % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will + % correct for both. + \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and + bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} +\fi + + + + + + + +% LIST SPACING CONTROLS + +% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing +% above and below \trivlist +% Both \list and IED lists override this. +% However, \trivlist will use this as will most +% things built from \trivlist like the \center +% environment. +\topsep 0.5\baselineskip + +% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded +% or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase +% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero. +% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster. +\partopsep \z@ + +% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. +% IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs +% so this is also zero. +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to +% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists). +\parsep \z@ + +% Controls the extra spacing between list items. +% IEEE does not put extra spacing between items. +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect +% lists (but not IED lists). +\itemsep \z@ + +% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list +% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter +% it, you have to do so when you call the \list. +% However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment +% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below +\itemindent -1em + +% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to +% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list. +% Hence this statement does nothing for lists. +% But, quote and verse do use it for indention. +\leftmargin 2em + +% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list +% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and +% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they +% all are overridden. +\leftmargini 2em +%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used. +%\leftmargini 0em +\leftmarginii 1em +\leftmarginiii 1.5em +\leftmarginiv 1.5em +\leftmarginv 1.0em +\leftmarginvi 1.0em +\labelsep .5em +\labelwidth \z@ + + +% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained. +% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the +% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the +% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). +% \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around +% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list. +% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in +% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes +% of these values DO affect \list +% +\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} +\let\@listI\@listi +\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} + + +% IEEE uses 5) not 5. +\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} + +% IEEE uses a) not (a) +\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} + +% IEEE uses iii) not iii. +\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} + +% IEEE uses A) not A. +\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} + +% exactly the same as in article.cls +\def\p@enumii{\theenumi} +\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} +\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} + +% itemized list label styles +\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$} +\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}} +\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$} +\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$} + + + +% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS **** +% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls +% *************************** +% +% +% IEEE seems to use at least two different values by +% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right +% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal +% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use +% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications +% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. +% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose +% which one you like in your document using a command such as: +% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA +\IEEEilabelindentA 0pt%\parindent + +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB +\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent +% However, we'll default to using \parindent +% which makes more sense to me +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent +\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA + + +% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels +% are indented to the right. +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention +\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent +\IEEEelabelindent \parindent + +% This controls the default amount the description list labels +% are indented to the right. +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention +\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent +\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent + +% This is the value actually used within the IED lists. +% The IED environments automatically set its value to +% one of the three values above, so global changes do +% not have any effect +\newdimen\IEEElabelindent +\IEEElabelindent \parindent + +% The actual amount labels will be indented is +% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below +% corresponding to the level of nesting depth +% This provides a means by which the user can +% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper +% levels +% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" +% values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific +% circumstances. +% The first list level almost always has full indention. +% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation +% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing +% that they don't use any indentation. +\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} + +% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto +% set to one of the 6 values above +% global changes here have no effect +\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0} + +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED +% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for +% the labels. +\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep +\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em + +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED +% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for +% the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the +% spacing in these cases +\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep +\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em + +% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and +% below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing +% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. +\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep +\IEEEiedtopsep 6pt plus 1pt minus 1pt + + +% This command is executed within each IED list environment +% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the +% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing +% global parameters that affect things other than lists. +% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} +% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until +% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. +\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax} + +% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based +% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent +% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} +% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: +% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} + +% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the +% width of the given text. It is the same as +% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} +% and useful as a shorter alternative. +% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width +% of the longest label in the list +\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} + +% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the +% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal +% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via +% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list +% environments. +\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} + +% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically +% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep +% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin +% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) +% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list +% environments to have an effect. +\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin +\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse + +% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by +% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level. +% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option +% of the IED list environments to have an effect. +\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor +\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse + + +% internal variable to indicate type of IED label +% justification +% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right +\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0} + + +% commands to allow the user to control IED +% label justifications. Use these commands within +% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl +% Note that changing the normal list justifications +% is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so! +% I include these commands as they may be helpful to +% those who are using these enhanced list controls for +% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. +% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right +% justification, description defaults to left. +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right + + + + +% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies +% this allows us to set all the list parameters within +% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) +% from overriding any of our parameters +% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% +\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% +\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% +\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} + +% Note controlled spacing here +\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% +\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% +\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% +\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% +\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% +\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% +\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% +\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% +\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% +\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} + + +% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments +% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description +% which must be created by the base classes +% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate +\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize +\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize +\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate +\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate + +% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls +\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription} + {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin + \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} + {\endlist} +\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep + \normalfont\bfseries #1} + + +% override LaTeX's default IED lists +\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} +\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} +\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} +\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} +\def\description{\@IEEEdescription} +\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} + +% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that +% override itemize, enumerate, or description +\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} +\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} +\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} +\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} +\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} +\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} + + +% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal +% commands so they are protected against redefinition +\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} +\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} +\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} +\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% + \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + \advance\@itemdepth\@ne% + \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \IEEElabelindent10pt%\IEEEilabelindent% + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % calculate the label width + % the user can override this later if + % they specified a \labelwidth + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% + \fi}\fi\fi}% + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% + \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + \advance\@enumdepth\@ne% + \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent% + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % calculate the label width + % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using + % normalfont 1) to 9) + % The user can override this later + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% + \fi}\fi\fi}% + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% + % assume normal labelsep + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % Bogus label width in case the user forgets + % to set it. + % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you + % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to + % display it on the screen during compilation + % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out + % which label is the widest) + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax% + \fi}\fi} + +% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. +\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax +\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else +\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax +\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else +\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} + + +% VERSE and QUOTE +% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment +\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax} + {\endlist} +\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax} + {\endlist} +\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax} + {\endlist} + + +% \titlepage +% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct +% way to create the title page. +\newif\if@restonecol +\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} +\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} + +% standard values from article.cls +\arraycolsep 5pt +\arrayrulewidth .4pt +\doublerulesep 2pt + +\tabcolsep 6pt +\tabbingsep 0.5em + + +%% FOOTNOTES +% +%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt +% V1.6 respond to changes in font size +% space added above the footnotes (if present) +\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip + +% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes +% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in +% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep +% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed +% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since +% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip +% above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to +% use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing +% between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad +% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps +% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran +% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle. +{\footnotesize +\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip} + + +\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins +\fboxsep = 8pt +\fboxrule = .4pt +% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark +% Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need +% box resizing tricks here. +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 10pt\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em +% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }} +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 10pt\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1} +\fi + +% IEEE does not use footnote rules +\def\footnoterule{} + +% V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot" +% system to implement this. +\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule +\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule +\kern-5pt +\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} +\kern4.6pt +\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse +\else +\relax +\fi} +\fi + +% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages +\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 + +% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations +% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000, +% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100. +\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 + +% default allows section depth up to /paragraph +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} + +% technotes do not allow /paragraph +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} +\fi +% neither do compsoc conferences +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}} + + +\newcounter{section} +\newcounter{subsection}[section] +\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] +\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection] + +% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may +% have their own, different, implementations +\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] + +% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents +\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1 +\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% compsoc is all arabic +\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} +\def\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}} +\def\thesubsubsection{\arabic{subsubsection})} +\def\theparagraph{\arabic{paragraph}} +\else +\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I +% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - +\def\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}} % I-A +% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1 +\def\thesubsubsection{\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1 +\def\theparagraph{\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a +\fi + +% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to +% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks. +% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but +% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions. +\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}% +\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax} + + +% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings) +% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes +% in the former to automatically appear in the latter +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} + \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.} + \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}:} + \else% compsoc not conferencs + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection} + \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}} + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection}} + \def\theparagraphdis{\arabic{paragraph}:} + \fi +\else% not compsoc%%%%%%% section numbering + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I. + \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B. + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3) + \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph}:} % d) +\fi + +% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum +\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) +% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray +\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) +% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on +% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis +\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis} + + + +% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does +\def\contentsname{Contents} +\def\listfigurename{List of Figures} +\def\listtablename{List of Tables} +\def\refname{REFERENCES} +\def\indexname{Index} +\def\figurename{FIGURE} +\def\tablename{TABLE} +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{FIGURE}\def\tablename{TABLE}} +\def\partname{Part} +\def\appendixname{Appendix} +\def\abstractname{Abstract} +% IEEE specific names +\def\IEEEkeywordsname{INDEX TERMS} +\def\IEEEproofname{Proof} + + +% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS +% +\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} +\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em} +\def\@dotsep{4.5} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} + +% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily +% collide with the section titles. +% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders. +% MDS 1/2001 +\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}} +\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}% + \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth% + \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par% + \endgroup} +% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep +\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}} +\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}} +% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth +% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents +% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are! +\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}} +\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}} +\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}} +\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}} +\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}} +\let\l@table\l@figure + + +%% Definitions for floats +%% +%% Normal Floats +\floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip +\textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip +\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil +\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil +\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil +\def\topfraction{0.9} +\def\bottomfraction{0.4} +\def\floatpagefraction{0.8} +% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page +\def\textfraction{0.1} + +%% Double Column Floats +\dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip + +\dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip +% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e. +% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best +% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable +% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and +% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with +% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex +% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998. +% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't +% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing. + +\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil +\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil +\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil +\def\dbltopfraction{0.8} +\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8} +\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4} + +\intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip +\setcounter{topnumber}{2} +\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} +\setcounter{totalnumber}{4} + + + +% article class provides these, we should too. +\newlength\abovecaptionskip +\newlength\belowcaptionskip +% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table +% captions +\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.25\baselineskip} +\setlength\belowcaptionskip{7.5pt} +% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be +% overridden by a user +\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% +\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\belowcaptionskip\relax}% + + +% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments +% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref. +\def\@IEEEtablestring{table} + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% +% test if is a for a figure or table +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% +% if a table, do table caption +\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}% +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace +% if not a table, format it as a figure +\else +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% +% if caption is shorter than a line, center +\else% +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\fi\fi} +\else% nonconference compsoc +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% +% test if is a for a figure or table +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% +% if a table, do table caption +\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}% +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace +% if not a table, format it as a figure +\else +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% +% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify +\else% +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\fi\fi} +\fi + +\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% +% test if is a for a figure or table +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% +% if a table, do table caption +\textcolor{ojcolor}{\tablecapnumfont#1.}\space{\tablecapfont #2}% +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace +% if not a table, format it as a figure +\else +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace +% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\enspace#2}% TB FIG +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around +\vspace*{2pt}% +{\textcolor{ojcolor}{\figcapnumfont#1.}\space{\figcapfont#2\par}}%TB FIG +% +% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise +\fi} +\fi + + + +% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label +% within \caption +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}% +\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label +\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax +\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}% +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}% +\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave +\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi} +\fi + + +% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with +% preview-latex +\newcounter{figure} +\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} +\def\fps@figure{tbp} +\def\ftype@figure{1} +\def\ext@figure{lof} +\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure} +\def\figure{\@float{figure}} +\def\endfigure{\end@float} +%% +\newbox\marginfigbox +\def\marginfigure{\@float{figure}\global\setbox\marginfigbox\vbox\bgroup\hsize270pt} +\def\endmarginfigure{\egroup\ifodd\c@page\else\hspace*{-60pt}\fi\box\marginfigbox\end@float} +%% +\@namedef{marginfigure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}\global\setbox\marginfigbox\vbox\bgroup\hsize495pt} +\@namedef{marginendfigure*}{\egroup\ifodd\c@page\else\hspace*{-60pt}\fi\box\marginfigbox\end@dblfloat} + +\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}} +\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} + +\newcounter{table} +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\thetable{\arabic{table}} +\else +\def\thetable{\@arabic\c@table} +\fi +\def\fps@table{tbp} +\def\ftype@table{2} +\def\ext@table{lot} +\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable} +% V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables +% to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray + +\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}} +\def\endtable{\end@float} + +\newbox\margintabbox +\def\margintable{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}\global\setbox\margintabbox\vbox\bgroup\hsize270pt} +\def\endmargintable{\egroup\ifodd\c@page\else\hspace*{-60pt}\fi\box\margintabbox\end@float} + +% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well. +\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}} +\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} + +\@namedef{margintable*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}\global\setbox\margintabbox\vbox\bgroup\hsize495pt} +\@namedef{marginendtable*}{\egroup\ifodd\c@page\else\hspace*{-60pt}\fi\box\margintabbox\end@dblfloat} + + + + +%% +%% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS +%% +%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX +%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, +%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, +%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. +%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) + + +% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting +\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form +\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse + +\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter +% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray +% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both +\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue + +\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined +\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used + + +% The default math style used by the columns +\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} +% The default text style used by the columns +% default to using the current font +\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} + +% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray +\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} + +% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber +% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package +% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as +% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. +\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} +\def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue} +\def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse} + + +\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray +\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi% +\def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi} + +% flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation +\newif\if@IEEEissubequation% +\@IEEEissubequationfalse + +% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers +\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} + +% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments +% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the +% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} +\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}% +% check if column is defined +\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname% +\else% if not, error and use default type +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak +Using a default centering column instead}% +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname% +\fi% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} + +% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray +\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} + + +% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} + + +% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} + + +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types + + +% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list +% used to build up the \halign preamble +\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% +\@@IEEEappendtoksA} + +% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument +% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register +\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% +\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% +\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} + +% define some common column types for the user +% math +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} +% text +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} + +% vertical rules +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% +{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} + +% horizontal rules +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} + +% plain +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} + +% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} + + +% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} +% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} + +% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column +% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue + + + +% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell +% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] +% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. +\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} + +% creates a blank separator row +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% +% get the skip value, based on the font commands +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% +\else% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% +\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + +% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% +% get the skip value, based on the font commands +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% +\else% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% +\fi% +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + + + +% draws a single rule across all the columns optional +% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] +\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule +% turn off any struts +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + + +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then +% another single rule row +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% +\else% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% +\fi% +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +} + +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then +% another single rule row +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% +\else% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% +\fi% +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +} + + + +% inserts a full row's worth of &'s +% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns +% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% +\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all +\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% +\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count +\repeat% +\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s +} + + + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines +\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used + + + +% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% save values +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} + +% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% restore values +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} + + +% globally restores the strut height and depth to the +% master values and sets the master strut flag to true +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% restore values +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} + + +% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current +% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth +% and the use master strut flag, global +% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried +% into the isolation/strut column +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% +\fi} + + + +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height +% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside +% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut +% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut +% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip +% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current +% font is used. +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\else% arg one present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\else% arg two present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +% remove stretchability, just to be safe +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master +\else% outer, have to set master strut too +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut +\fi} + + +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height +% and depth to both the master and local struts. +% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth +% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use +% of the local strut values. +% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current +% font is used. +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% +\skip0=0pt\relax% +\else% arg one present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% +\skip2=0pt\relax% +\else% arg two present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +% remove stretchability, just to be safe +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size +% get local strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% +% add it to the user supplied values +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% +% update the local strut size +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master +\else% outer, have to set master strut too +% get master strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% add it to the user supplied values +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% +% update the local and master strut sizes +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut +\fi} + + +% allow user a way to see the struts +\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts +\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse + +% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut +% get master strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +\else% +% get local strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% +\fi% +% remove stretchability, probably not needed +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +% allow user to see struts if desired +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% +\else% +\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} + + +% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray +% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. +% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 +\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} +\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% +\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% +\else% +\skip0=#1\relax% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% +\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% +\else% +\skip2=#2\relax% +\fi% +% remove stretchability, probably not needed +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% +\else% +\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} + + +% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the +% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% +\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} + + + +\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} +\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} + +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} + + +% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. +% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. +% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} +\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{% + % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not + % the star form was involked + \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse + \else% not the star form + \global\@eqnswtrue + \fi% if star form + \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations + \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it + \lineskip=0pt\relax + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% + \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build + \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet + \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label + \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line + \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + % put in the column for the equation number + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first + \toks0={##}% + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% + % add the isolation column + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% + % add the equation number col to the preamble + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% + % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax + % begin the display alignment + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines + $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup + % "exspand" the preamble + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} + +% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use +% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, +% restore counters to correct values and exit +\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup% +\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi% +\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne% +$$\@ignoretrue} + +% need a way to remember if last line is a subequation +\newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation% +\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse + +% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to +% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column +% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column + {\ifnum0=`}\fi + \@ifstar{% + \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR + }{% + \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR + }% +} + +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} + +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% + \ifnum0=`{\fi}% + \@@IEEEeqnarraycr + \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% + +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak + environment}% + {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak + specifications.}\relax% + \else + \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count + \repeat + % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column + \fi + % execute the &'s + \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% + % handle the strut/isolation column + \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray + &% and enter the equation number column + % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the + % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was + \if@eqnsw% + \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}% + \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue% + \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter + \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% + \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi% + \fi% + % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers + \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi + \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag + % reset the number of columns the user actually used + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax + % the real end of the line + \cr} + + + + + +% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything +% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second +% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, +% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox +% within an hbox. +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within +% a \hbox{$ $} construct. +% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. +% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - +% natural width is the default. +% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} +% for \vcenter in non-math mode +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% +\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse + +\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} +\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} + +% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs +\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign + \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it + \lineskip=0pt\relax% + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% + \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build + \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing + \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first + \toks0={##}% + % add the isolation column to the preamble + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax + % begin the alignment + \everycr{}% + % use only the very first token to determine the positioning + % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, + % but is probably not worth the effort + % \noindent is used as a delimiter + \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% + \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent + % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded + % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now + \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% + % use the appropriate vbox type + \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% + \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines + \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% + \bgroup + % "exspand" the preamble + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} + +% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, +% exit from math mode if needed, and exit +\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status +&% enter isolation/strut column +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed +\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values +% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray +% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox +\crcr\egroup\egroup% +% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed +\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} + + + +% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to +% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray +% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column +% carry strut status into isolation/strut column +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status +&% enter isolation/strut column +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed +% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% +{\ifnum0=`}\fi% +\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} + +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} + +% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% +\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} + + + +% starts the halign preamble build +\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start +\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known +% ensure these are valid +\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition +% currently acquired numerically referenced glue +% use a name that is easier to remember +\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0% +% tracks number of columns in the preamble +\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% +% record the default end glues +\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% +\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% +% now parse the user's column specifications +\@@IEEEbuildpreamble} + + +% parses and builds the halign preamble +\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% +% use only the very first token to check the end +% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% +% identify current and next token type +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next +% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% +% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% +% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% +% process the acquired glue +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% +% process the acquired col +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% +% ready prevtype for next col spec. +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% +% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group +\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} + + +% executed just after preamble build is completed +% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue +\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax +\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% +{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% +\fi%num cols less than 1 +%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} + + +% Identify and return the column specifier's type code +\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded +% n = number +% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) +% c = letter +% e = \end +% u = undefined +% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char +\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise +\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else +\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences +\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax +\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi +\if#2u\relax +\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% +{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak +as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} + + +% identify the current letter referenced column +% if invalid, use a default column +\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak +Using a default centering column instead}% +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} + + +% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value +\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% +% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) +% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) +% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) +% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) +% ' = \quad 1em +% " = \qquad 2em +% . = 0.5\arraycolsep +% / = \arraycolsep +% ? = 2\arraycolsep +% * = 1fil +% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter +% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero +% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 +% value for 1em. +% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text +% \noindent is used as a delimiter here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +% get the math font 1em value +% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs +% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. +% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure +% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, +% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. +% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. +{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% +% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% +% identify the glue value based on the first token +% we discard anything after the first +\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else +\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else +\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else +\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else +\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak +0pt instead}% +{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak +IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} + + + +% process a numerical digit from the column specification +% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value +% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired +\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak +after the first}% +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% +\else% if we previously aborted a glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion +\else%acquire this number +% save the previous type before the numerical digits started +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% +\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% +\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition +\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% +\else%user glue not defined +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak +0pt instead}% +{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak +\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% +\fi% glue defined or not +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition +\fi%close acquisition, get glue +\fi%discard or acquire number +\fi%prevtype glue or not +} + + +% process an acquired glue +% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble +\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions +\else +% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else +% as this is not used in the preamble, but before +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% +\else%not the start glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak +after the first}% +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue +\else% not a back to back glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi +\toks0={##}% +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi +% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand +% the column definition +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble +\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak +type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak +specifier}% +{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak +between column types.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue +\fi% previous was a column +\fi% back-to-back glues +\fi% is start column glue +\fi% prev type not a +} + + +% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble +\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else +% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) +% so we must add this column to the preamble now +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue +\toks0={##}% +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi +% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand +% the column definition +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble +\fi%next type not numeral +\fi%next type not glue +} + + +%% +%% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS +%% +% set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different +% modes IEEEtran supports +\def\ps@headings{% + \def\@oddhead{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth\vspace*{-13.5pt}\hfill\hbox{\vbox to 29pt{\hsize122.8pt\vspace*{12pt}\OJlogo}}\par\vspace*{-2.25pt}\hbox to \textwidth{\vrule width\textwidth height.3pt depth0pt}}}% + \def\@evenhead{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth\vbox to 0pt{\hsize\textwidth\vspace*{7.7pt}\rfxfont\raggedright\rightmark:\ \leftmark\hfill\par}\par\vspace*{16pt}\hbox to \textwidth{\vrule width\textwidth height.3pt depth0pt}}}% + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox to \textwidth{{\rffont\thepage}\hfill{{\rffont VOLUME\ \@jvol,\ \@pubyear}}}}% + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox to \textwidth{{{\rffont VOLUME\ \@jvol,\ \@pubyear}}\hfill{\rffont\thepage}}}% + }% + % +% title page style +%%%%%%% +\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% + \def\@oddhead{\headertext@blue{\rhfont\leftmark \hfil \rightmark}}% \thepage}% + \def\@evenhead{\headertext@blue{\rhfont\rightmark\hfil \leftmark}}%\thepage + \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth{\vspace*{24pt}% + \footrule@blue{\rule{\textwidth}{2pt}}\vspace*{-28pt}\par% + \rule{\textwidth}{.5pt}\par\vspace*{-15.5pt}% + \Footrule@blue{\rfoot}\vspace*{-10pt}\par% + {\whiteink{\rffont Vol.\ \@jvol,\ No.\ \@jnum,\ \@jmonth\ \@pubyear\hfill Page\ \thepage\par}}}}}% + \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}% +% peer review cover page style +\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% +\def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}% +\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else + \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% + \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% + \fi +\else + % non-draft mode footers + \if@IEEEusingpubid + \footskip 0pt% + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \else + \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \fi + \fi +\fi} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\def\ps@plain{% + \def\@oddhead{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth\vspace*{-13pt}\vbox to 29pt{\hsize126pt\vspace*{11.5pt}\OJlogo}\hfill\par\vspace*{-2.75pt}\hbox to \textwidth{\vrule width\textwidth height.3pt depth0pt}}}% + \let\@evenhead\@oddhead% + \def\@evenfoot{\vbox to 10pt{\hbox to \textwidth{\hfill\rffont This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 License. For more information, see https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/\hfill}\par\vspace*{-12pt}% + \hbox to \textwidth{{\rffont\thepage}\hfill{{\rffont VOLUME\ \@jvol,\ \@pubyear}}}}}% + \def\@oddfoot{\vbox to 10pt{\hbox to \textwidth{\hfill\rffont This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 License. For more information, see https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/\hfill}\par\vspace*{-12pt}% + \hbox to \textwidth{{{\rffont VOLUME\ \@jvol,\ \@pubyear}}\hfill{\rffont\thepage}}}}% + }% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% start with empty headings +\def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{} + + +%% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same +%% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. +%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text +%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually +%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the +%% arguments to \markboth. +\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{{{#1}}}% +\def\rightmark{{{#2}}}} +\def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}} + +\def\today{\ifcase\month\or + January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or + July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi + \space\number\day, \number\year} + + + + +%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS +%% +%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff +% +% +% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], [" +\def\@citex[#1]#2{% + \let\@citea\@empty + \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do + {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% + \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% + \G@refundefinedtrue + \@latex@warning + {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% + {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}} + +% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's +% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the +% following format controls are already defined and will not +% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the +% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" - +% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12] +% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}. +% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will +% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally +% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in +% that \cite. +% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments +% to produce the IEEE style. +\def\citepunct{], [} +\def\citedash{]--[} + +% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty +\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname} + +% V1.6 class files should always provide these +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} +\let\@openbib@code\@empty + + +% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. +% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in +% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty: +% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature} +% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak} +\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}} +\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack + \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% + \@esphack} + +% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before +% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance +% the columns on the last page +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that + % the command is not executed +\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage} + +% allow the user to alter the triggered command +\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}} + +% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the +% command is executed +\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1% +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}% + +% trigger command at the given reference +\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% +\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi} + + +\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} + +% compsoc journals left align the reference numbers +\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{#1.\hfill}} + +% controls bib item spacing +\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt} + +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} + +\def\ackrule{\par\noindent\rule{\textwidth}{.5pt}\par} + +\def\thebibliography#1{% + \section*{\bibsectionfont\refname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% + % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger + \bibliofont\let\it\itshape\vskip 0.2\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% + \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% + \labelsep5pt% + \leftmargin\labelwidth + \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax + %\itemindent10pt% + \itemsep\IEEEbibitemsep\relax + \usecounter{enumiv}% + \let\p@enumiv\@empty + \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem% + \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}% +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% +% originally: +% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% +% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more +% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference. +% IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with +% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, +% but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. +% MDS 11/2000 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100% +\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi% + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax} +\let\endthebibliography=\endlist + + + + +% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS +% +% +% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author +% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font +%\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}} + +\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\bfseries\textit{#1}}} + +% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation. +% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote +% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} +% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you +% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote +% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks. +% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical +% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that +% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding +% with the text above. +% V1.7 make this a robust command +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or% + \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger% + \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}} + + +% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS +% +% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} +% The default if the user does not use an author block +\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} + +% spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode) +% can be negative +\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em} +% compsoc conferences need more space here +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}} + +% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +% This can be negative. +% IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these +% controls in place in case they ever change their mind. +% Personally, I like 0.75ex. +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex} +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex} +% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make +% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the +% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, +% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep +% these above 2.6ex +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex} + +% This tracks the required strut size. +% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used. +\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex} + +% variables to retain font size and style across groups +% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n} + +% saves the current font attributes +\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape} + +% restores the saved font attributes +\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}% +\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}% +\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}% +\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}% +\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}% +\selectfont} + + +% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column +\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse + + +% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace +% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines +% within the halign environment. +% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above +% baseline portion at 70% of the total length. +% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch +\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace% +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}} + + +% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. +% Makes formatting easy for conferences +% +% use real definitions in conference mode +% name block +\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro +% do a spacer row if needed +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column +%restore the correct strut value +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}% +% input the author names +#1% +% end the row if the user did not already +\crcr} +% spacer row for names +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}} +% +% affiliation block +\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro +% do a spacer row if needed +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column +%restore the correct strut value +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}% +% input the author affiliations +#1% +% end the row if the user did not already +\crcr} +% spacer row for affiliations +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}} + + +% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other +% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks. +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +\else + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca + \else% + % not conference or peerreviewca mode + \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}% + \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\par{\affilfont#1}}% + \fi +\fi +% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular +\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style + \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% + \baselineskip=0pt\relax% + \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one + \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing + \everycr{}% ensure no problems here + \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet + \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space + \vtop\bgroup%vtop box + \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax + \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr} + +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox +\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup} + +% handle bogus star form +\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}} + +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] +\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip} + +% end the line and do the optional spacer +\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}} + + + +% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages +\newif\if@IEEEWARNand +\@IEEEWARNandtrue + +% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a +% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid +% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes. +\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override + +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only + when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse} + +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% +\fi +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% +\fi + +\usepackage{color,ifpdf,ifthen} +\AtBeginDocument{% +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJCS}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2}}{%OJCS +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJEMB}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{0.67,1,0.04,0.05}}{%OJEMB +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJIA}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{1,0,0.33,0.35}}{%OJIA +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJIES}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{0,0.61,0.97,0}}{%OJIES +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJNANO}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{1,0,0,0}}{%OJNANO +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJPEL}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{0,1,0.63,0.12}}{%OJPEL +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJSP}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2}}{%OJSP +\ifthenelse{\equal{\@JourAcronym}{OJVT}}{\definecolor{ojcolor}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2}}{%OJVT +}}}}}}}}}% +%% +\definecolor{ojcscol}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2} +\definecolor{ojembcol}{cmyk}{0.67,1,0.04,0.05} +\definecolor{ojiacol}{cmyk}{1,0,0.33,0.35} +\definecolor{ojiescol}{cmyk}{0,0.61,0.97,0} +\definecolor{ojnanocol}{cmyk}{1,0,0,0} +\definecolor{ojpelcol}{cmyk}{0,1,0.63,0.12} +\definecolor{ojspcol}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2} +\definecolor{ojvtcol}{cmyk}{1,0.3,0,0.2} +%% +\definecolor{white}{gray}{1} +\definecolor{gray20}{gray}{.80} +\long\def\whiteink#1{{\color{white}{#1}}}% +\long\def\title@green#1{{{#1}}}% + +% page clearing command +% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles +% for the inserted blank pages +\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else +\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} + + +% user command to invoke the title page +\def\maketitle{\par% + \begingroup% + \normalfont% + \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty + \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author + \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well. + \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines + \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info + % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc +%% \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}% +%% \normalsize% +%% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +%% \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% +%% \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks% +%% \else +%% \if@twocolumn% +%% \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% +%% \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% +%% \else +%% \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]% +%% \fi +%% \else + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \twocolumn[\@maketitle]%%\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% +%% \fi + \thispagestyle{plain}%{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks% +%% \fi + % pullup page for pubid if used. +%% \if@IEEEusingpubid +%% \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}% +%% \fi + \endgroup + \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax + \gdef\@thanks{}% + % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers + % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}% + \let\thanks\relax} + + + +% V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext +\long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% TB Maketitle %%%%%%%%%% +\def\corfont{\reset@font\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{6.6}{7.5}\selectfont\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\editorfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{12}{14}\selectfont\leftskip4pc\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\sptitlefont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{16}{18}\selectfont\leftskip4pc\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\titlefont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{22}{24}\selectfont\bfseries\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +%%\def\affiliation#1{\par\vskip12pt{\affilfont#1}\par}% +\def\doi@font{\fontsize{6}{9}\selectfont\normalfont\itshape\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\doiinfo#1{\gdef\@doiinfo{#1}\par}% +\doiinfo{} +\def\sptitle#1{\gdef\@sptitle{#1}}\sptitle{} +\def\editor#1{\gdef\@editor{#1}}\editor{} +\def\authornote#1{\gdef\@authornote{#1}}\authornote{} +\newbox\tempbox +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\def\@maketitle{\newpage + \bgroup% + \vspace*{-10.5pt}% + {\receivedfont \ifx\@receiveddate\@empty\else Received\ \@receiveddate\fi\ifx\@revised\@empty\else;\ revised\ \@reviseddate\fi\ifx\@accepteddate\@empty\else;\ accepted\ \@accepteddate\fi\ifx\@publisheddate\@empty\else; Date of publication\nobreakspace\@publisheddate\fi\ifx\@currentdate\@empty\else;\space date of current version\nobreakspace\@currentdate\fi.\space\ifx\@editor\@empty\else\@editor\fi\par}% + \ifx\@doiinfo\@empty\else\vskip3pt{\doi@font Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/\@doiinfo\par}\fi% + \vskip14.5pt{\titlefont{\textcolor{ojcolor}{\@title}}\par\vskip8.5pt}% + {\authorfont\@author\par}\vskip4pt{\afffont\@affil}\par\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\vskip5pt% + \ifx\@corresp\@empty\else{\corfont\@corresp\par}\vskip5.5pt\fi% + \ifx\@authornote\@empty\else{\afffont\@authornote\par}\vskip27.5pt\fi% + % + \centerline{\rule{36pc}{.5pt}}\par\vskip11.5pt% + \ifvoid\abstractbox\else{\reset@font\box\abstractbox}\fi\par\vskip11.5pt% + \ifvoid\keybox\else{\reset@font\box\keybox}\fi\par\vskip-32pt% + \centerline{\rule{36pc}{.5pt}}%% + \par\addvspace{33.5pt}\egroup% + \let\maketitle\relax +}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}% +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}% +\hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} + +% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def +% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule +\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue} + + +\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape + \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}} +\let\@thanks\@empty + +% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par. + +% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and +% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts. +\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}% +\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% +\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax} + + +% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item +\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks +% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule + {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax + \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item} +\else +% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}} +% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[] +\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}% +{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}} +% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument +\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break +\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces} +\fi + + +% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn +\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace] +\else +\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip +\fi +\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}} +\else +% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax} +\fi + +% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers. +\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}% +\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par +\end{center}} + + + +% V1.6 +% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text +% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column +% of two column text (technotes). +\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize +% adjust spacing to next text +% v1.6b handle peer review papers +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages +% regardless of the other paper modes + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip +\else + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% + \else% + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% + \else% journal uses more space + \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip% + \fi + \fi +\fi}} + + +% V1.6 +% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors +% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two +% column text (most common) +% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the +% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip +% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the +% text on the titlepage +% The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account. +\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{% + % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done + \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height + \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height + \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names + \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns + \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines + % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer + % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to + % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be + % lengthened + % default to journal values + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}% + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}% + % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% + \fi + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% + \fi% + % get the height that the title will take up + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview + \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}% + \else + \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}% + \fi + \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign + % add the height of the page textheight + \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight% + % correct for title pages using pubid + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else + % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only. + % And the cover page uses a static spacer. + \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi + \fi% + % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer + \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% + % \topskip takes away some too + \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip% + % calculate the column height of the main text for lines + % now we calculate the main text height as if holding + % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first + % and discard any excess fractional remainder + % we subtracted the first line, because the first line + % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the + % rest of the lines. + \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight% + \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% + \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% + % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will + % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always + % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer + % number of normal size lines + % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer + % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register + \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight% + \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight% + \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip% + % this is the calculated height of the spacer + % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer + % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register + \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight% + \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value + % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase + \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax% + \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% + % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead + \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax% + \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% + \fi% + \else% + % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease + \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% + \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% + \fi% + % set the calculated rigid spacer + \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}} + + + +% V1.6 +% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area +% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed +% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer. +\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax +\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}} + +% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords +% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for +% in the dynamic sizer. +\let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax +\long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}} +% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if +% not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed +% in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode. +\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{% +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi +\else% or if not compsoc +\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi} + + +% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current +% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing. +\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont +\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip% +\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax} + + +% abstract and keywords are in \small, except +% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize +% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small +% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt +\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small} +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine + \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize} +\fi + +% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}} +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}} + + + + +% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines +% so that spacing is more tightly controlled. +\newbox\abstractbox +\def\abstract{\global\setbox\abstractbox\vbox\bgroup\parindent0pt\hsize\textwidth\abstractfont\textcolor{ojcolor}{\abstractheadfont\bfseries ABSTRACT}\unskip\unskip\unskip\ignorespaces\hspace*{3pt}}% +% V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in +% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it) +\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi + \par\egroup\normalfont\normalsize}% +%%%%%%%% +\def\receivedfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{9}\selectfont\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill}% +\def\receiveddate#1{\gdef\@receiveddate{#1}}\receiveddate{}% +\def\reviseddate#1{\gdef\@reviseddate{#1}}\reviseddate{}% +\def\accepteddate#1{\gdef\@accepteddate{#1}}\accepteddate{}% +\def\publisheddate#1{\gdef\@publisheddate{#1}}\publisheddate{}% +\def\currentdate#1{\gdef\@currentdate{#1}}\currentdate{}% +%%%%%%%%%% +\newbox\keybox +\def\IEEEkeywords{\global\setbox\keybox\vbox\bgroup\parindent0pt\hsize\textwidth\unskip\unskip\unskip\ignorespaces\abstractfont\noindent{{\abstractheadfont\textcolor{ojcolor}{\bfseries\IEEEkeywordsname}}}\unskip\unskip\unskip\ignorespaces\hspace*{3pt}% + }% +\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace*{32pt}\fi + \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% + \egroup\normalfont\normalsize} + +% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference +\def\abstract{\normalfont + \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip + \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip + \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip + \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} + \else% compsoc not conference +\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax + \else + \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent + \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax + \else + \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} + \fi +\fi + + + +% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that +% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token +% +% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input +% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not +% affect the formatting of the text +\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ % +\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +% a control space will come in as a macro +% when it is the last one on a line +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one +% else spit it out and stop gobbling +\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else% +\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi% +\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}% + + + + +% TITLING OF SECTIONS +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are + % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space + % spacing from section number to title +% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ } +\fi\fi + + +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax} + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% compsoc journals need extra spacing +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% +\else + \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} +\fi% +\fi% + +%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control +%and use \@@par rather than \par +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \let\@svsec\@empty + \else + \refstepcounter{#1}% + % load section label and spacer into \@svsec + \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% + \fi% + \@tempskipa #5\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high + \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading + \noindent % subsections are NOT indented + % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title + % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal + {\hskip #3\relax{\@svsec}}{\interlinepenalty \@M {#8}\@@par}% + }% + \endgroup + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}% + \else % printout low level headings + % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} + % got rid of sectionmark stuff + \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax{\@svsec #8\ifnum#2=3\else.\fi}}%\@IEEEsectpunct%%%\@@par + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}% + \fi%skip down + \@xsect{#5}} + +%% SECTION heading spacing and font +%% +% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name +% (for \@sect) #2 - section level +% #3 - section heading indent +% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text) +% If negative, make stretch parts negative too! +% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading, +% negative: amount to indent main text after heading +% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation +% #6 - font control +% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent +% trouble when you do something like: +% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... +% IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section +% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good +% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber. +%% \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% +%% % IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode +%% \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% +%% {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\raggedright}}% +%% \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% +%% {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% +%% \else % for journals + \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-13pt \@plus -2pt \@minus -2pt}{0.0001pt}{\sectionfont}}% + \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-13pt \@plus -2pt \@minus -2pt}{1pt}{\subsectionfont}}% +%%\fi% + +% for both journals and conferences +% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-23pt \@plus -2pt \@minus -2pt}{1pt}{\subsubsectionfont}}% +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{-11pt \@plus-2pt \@minus-2pt}{1pt}{\paragraphfont}}% + + +%% % compsoc +%% \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +%% \ifCLASSOPTIONconference +%% % compsoc conference +%% \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% +%% {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}% +%% \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% +%% {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}% +%% \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% +%% {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}% +%% \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% +%% {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% +%% \else% compsoc journals +%% % use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles +%% \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% +%% {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% +%% % Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society, +%% % I have to look up an example. +%% \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}% +%% {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}% +%% \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}% +%% {0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}% +%% \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}% +%% {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% +%% \fi\fi + + + + +%% ENVIRONMENTS +% "box" symbols at end of proofs +\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box +% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one +\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}} +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc +\else +\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed +\fi + +% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support +% for an optional argument. +\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}} +\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\addvspace{12pt \@plus2pt \@minus2pt}\noindent{{\itshape #1: }}\par\noindent} +\def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par} + + +%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable +\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep12pt\rmfamily\trivlist% + \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2:}]\leavevmode\par\noindent\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep12pt\rmfamily \trivlist% +% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics +% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. + \item[\hskip\labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\leavevmode\par\noindent\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} +% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with +% lines below. +\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} + +% V1.6 +% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection +% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic. +% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number +% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator. +% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection +% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed. +% +% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override +\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}} +% string macro +\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section} + +% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection +% if section in_counter is used +\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% + \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname + {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]% + \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3} + \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% + \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep + \@thmcounter{#1}}% + \else + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep + \@thmcounter{#1}}% + \fi + \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% + \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} + + + +%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE +\ps@headings +\pagenumbering{arabic} + +% normally the page counter starts at 1 +\setcounter{page}{1} +% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1 +% (for duplex printing) +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview + \if@twoside + \setcounter{page}{-1} + \else + \setcounter{page}{0} + \fi +\fi + +% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as +% needed when single sided +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi +% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and +% enforce a rigid position for the last lines +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn +% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else + \twocolumn + \fi +\sloppy +\flushbottom +\fi + + + + +% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions + +% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package +% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau +% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command +% is present or not. +% For instance: +% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}} +% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if +% \appendices is invoked. +% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending +% on whether the user specifies a title: +% \section{My appendix title} +% or not: +% \section{} +% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title +% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of +% contents +\begingroup +\catcode`\Q=3 +\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} +\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} +\endgroup +% end of \@ifmtarg defs + + +% V1.7 +% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition +% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices +% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other +% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.) +\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section +\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax} + +% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument} +% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no +% argument (title) +% note we reroute the call to the old \section* +\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{% +\@ifmtarg{#1}{% +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{% +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}} + +% we use this if the user calls \section{} after +% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the +% command and its argument. Then, warn the user. +\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless +\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}} + + +% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls +% and in the Table of Contents. +% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself + +% appendix command for one single appendix +% normally has no heading. However, if you want a +% heading, you can do so via the optional argument: +% \appendix[Optional Heading] +\def\appendix{\relax} +\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique + \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}% + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% + \setcounter{section}{0}% + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% + \gdef\thesection{A}% + \gdef\thesectiondis{}% + \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}% + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A} + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter + \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{% + \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}% + % redefine \section command for appendix + % leave \section* as is + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% + \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument + % of the normal form +} + + + +% appendices command for multiple appendices +% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to +% declare the individual appendices +\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique + \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}% + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% + \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0 + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% + \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices% + \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}% + \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}% + \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}% + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}} + \else% + \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}% + \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}% + \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}% + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}} + \fi% + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter + \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix + % redefine \section command for appendices + % leave \section* as is + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form + \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so, + \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument + % of the normal form +} + + + +% \IEEEPARstart +% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the +% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter +% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the +% first word which will be rendered in upper case. +% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to: +% +% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment +% within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart. +% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family +% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that +% interword glue will now work as normal. +% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. +% +% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. +% +% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users +% to change the font style. +% +% the number of lines that are indented to clear it +% may need to increase if using decenders +\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2} +% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to +% be overly cautious +\def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2} +% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text +% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called). +\def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T} +% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline +% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum +% of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current +% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip +% so that it can respond to changes therein. +\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip} +% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in, +% can take zero or one argument. +\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries} +% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify +% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument. +\def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} +% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word, +% can take zero or one argument. +\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax} +% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify +% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument. +\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} +% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. +% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced +% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. +\def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em} +% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap. +\def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em} +% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap. +\def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/} + +% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries} +\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape} +\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax} +\fi + +% definition of \IEEEPARstart +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES +% +% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use +% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter +% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second +% argument is the rest of the first word(s). +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{% +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start +% on a new one +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% +% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE +% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued +\noindent +% calculate the desired height of the big letter +% it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font +% down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}% +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% +% extract the name of the current font in bold +% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME +\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% +{\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% +\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}% +% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired +% height of the drop letter +\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% +% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}% +% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the +% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% +\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% +\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% +\fi% +% and store it as a counter +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% +% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital +% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, +% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA +% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB +% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer +% division. Hence the use of the counters. +% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will +% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% +% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by +% floating point values +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the +% big letter. +\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% +% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the +% hanging indent +\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont +\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}% +% end of the isolated calculation environment +% add in the extra clearance we want +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax% +% add in the optional offset +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax% +% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the +% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use +% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command +% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other +% text won't be displaced by it. +\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% +\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% +\raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}% +\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}% +\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}% +{\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}} + + + + + + +% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater +% than the specified space of argument one +% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) +% and issue a \newpage +% +% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} +% +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to +% be overly cautious +% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau +% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, +% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine +% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead +\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left +\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% +\newpage% +\fi\endgroup} + + +% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT +% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size) +% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic! +% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a +% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo. +% MDS 7/2001 +% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries +\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue + +% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies +% and not just the previous section +\newcounter{IEEEbiography} +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0} + +% photo area size +\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area +\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area +% area cleared for photo +\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area +\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area + % actual depth will be a multiple of + % \baselineskip, rounded up +\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{20pt}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography + +\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{% +\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\rmfamily}\fontsize{8}{9}\selectfont%\footnotesize% +\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500% +% we need enough space to support the hanging indent +% the nominal value of the spacer +% and one extra line for good measure +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip% +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start +% with a new one +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}% +% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill +\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN% plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% +% the default box for where the photo goes +\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{% +\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}% +% +% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the +% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above +% and if so, override the default box with what they want +\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}% +\centering% +#1% +\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before +\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump +% to the biography, not the previous section +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% +\fi% +% one more biography +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}% +% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the +% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so +% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the +% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces. +\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command +\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate +% set the hanging indent +\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth% +\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}% +% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything +\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{% +\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}% +% now place the author name and begin the bio text +\noindent{\sffamily\bfseries \textcolor{ojcolor}{#2}\unskip\ignorespaces}\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par% +% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area +% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry +% MDS +\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding + \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% + \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut +\fi% +\par\normalfont} + + + +% V1.6 +% added biography without a photo environment +\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{% +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before +\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump +% to the biography, not the previous section +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% +\fi% +% one more biography +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}% +\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500% +\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% +\parskip=0pt\par% +\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont} + +% provide the user with some old font commands +% got this from article.cls +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} + + +% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS +% +% holds the special notice text +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax} + +% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do: +% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle +\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{% +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\centerline{\sffamily\itshape\small{#1}}\vspace*{1em}\mbox{}}% +} + + + + +% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS +% to insert a publisher's ID footer +% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style +% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle +% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page +% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into +% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author +% names and the maintext. +% +% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the +% publisher's ID footer +% IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, +% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip} +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote +% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no +% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the +% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the +% second column +% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on +% Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for +% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip +% and call it even. +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip} +\fi + +% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt} +\fi + +% holds the ID text +\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax} + +% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called +\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid +\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse +% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom +% V1.6 use before \maketitle +\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue} + + +% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in +% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of +% the title page when using \IEEEpubid +% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or +% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid +% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the +% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this +% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility +% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been +% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page. +% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc +\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else +\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi} + +% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other +% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to +% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX. + + + +%% Lockout some commands under various conditions + +% general purpose bit bucket +\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin} + +% flags to prevent multiple warning messages +\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext +\@IEEEWARNthankstrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue + + +%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed +%% +% save commands which might be locked out +% so that the user can later restore them if needed +\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext + + +% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode +% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter +% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch +% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft +% paper. +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart + is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} +\fi +% and for technotes +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart + is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} +\fi + + +% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid, +% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. +% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead +% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen +% from filling up with redundant messages +\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse} +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} + + +% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently. +% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname +% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname ) +% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine +% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the +% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command +% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX +% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break. +% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal +% name can be left undisturbed. +\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse% +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} +% and make biography point to our bogus biography +\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography +\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography + +\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse% +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} + +\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse} +\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse} +\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse} +\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse} +\fi + + +% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out +\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{% +\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}% +\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks% +\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart% +\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography% +\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography% +\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto% +\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto% +\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid% +\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol% +\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership% +\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext} + + + +% need a backslash character for typeout output +{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12 +|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}} + + +% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings +\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno). +Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} + + +% provide for legacy commands +\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} +\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} +\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} +\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} +\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} +\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} +\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED} +\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed} +\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen} +\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} + + + +% provide for legacy environments +\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography} +\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto} +\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} +\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography} +\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto} +\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} + + +% provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible +\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent +\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} +\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth} +\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep} +\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc} +\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl} +\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr} + +% let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded +% \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof +\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}} + +% V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported. +\def\overrideIEEEmargins{% +\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}% +\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}} + +\def\jvol#1{\gdef\@jvol{#1}}\jvol{} +% +\def\paper#1{\gdef\@paper{#1}}\paper{} +% +\def\jnum#1{\gdef\@jnum{#1}}\jnum{} +% +\def\jname#1{\gdef\@jname{#1}}\jname{} +% +\def\jmonth#1{\gdef\@jmonth{{#1}}}\jmonth{} +% +\def\pubyear#1{\gdef\@pubyear{#1}}\pubyear{} +% +\def\JournalAcronym#1{\gdef\@JourAcronym{#1}}\JournalAcronym{OJCS} +% +\def\authorfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{10}{13.5}\selectfont\bfseries\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\afffont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{6.6}{7.5}\selectfont\leftskip4pc plus1fill\rightskip4pc plus1fill} +\def\rfoot{\rule{\textwidth}{10pt}\par}% +\def\rhfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{11}{11}\selectfont}% +\def\foliofont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{16}{16}\selectfont}% +\def\rffont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{6}{6}\selectfont}% +\def\rfxfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{7}\selectfont}% +\def\bibliofont{\fontfamily{\rmdefault}\fontsize{8}{9}\selectfont}% +% +\def\tablefont{\fontfamily{\rmdefault}\fontsize{8}{10}\selectfont} +\def\tablecapfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{9}\selectfont\bfseries\rightskip0pt plus1fill} +\def\tablecapnumfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{9}\selectfont\bfseries} +\def\figcapfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{9}\selectfont\bfseries\rightskip0pt plus1fill} +\def\figcapnumfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{7}{9}\selectfont\bfseries} +\def\abstractfont{\fontfamily{\rmdefault}\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont\leftskip3pc\rightskip3pc} +\def\abstractheadfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont} +\def\sectionfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\bfseries\raggedright} +\def\bibsectionfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\bfseries\raggedright} +\def\subsectionfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\bfseries\itshape\raggedright} +\def\subsubsectionfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\raggedright} +\def\paragraphfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{12}\selectfont\itshape\raggedright} +% +\newdimen\footheight +\footheight\z@ + +%\usepackage{graphicx} + +\global\setlength\paperwidth{8.5in} +\global\setlength\paperheight{11in} + +\newdimen\typeheight\typeheight60pc% +\newdimen\typewidth\typewidth42pc% +\global\setlength\textheight{55.5pc} +\global\setlength\textwidth{42pc} + +\global\topmargin30pt +\oddsidemargin55.5pt%3.6pc +\evensidemargin55.5pt + +\setlength\headheight{5.1\p@}% +\setlength\headsep {37.6pt}% \typeheight - \textheight - \headheight +\setlength\topskip {7.2\p@} +\setlength\splittopskip {\topskip} +\addtolength\textheight{-1.25pt} +% +% COLORS DEFINITIONS +% +%% +%\parskip5.75pt +%\raggedright% +\voffset-6.75pc +\hoffset-5.3pc +%% %%%% +%% \def\Gin@setfile#1#2#3{% +%% \ifx\\#2\\\Gread@false\fi +%% \ifGin@bbox\else +%% \ifGread@ +%% \csname Gread@% +%% \expandafter\ifx\csname Gread@#1\endcsname\relax +%% eps% +%% \else +%% #1% +%% \fi +%% \endcsname{\Gin@base#2}% +%% \else +%% \Gin@nosize{#3}% +%% \fi +%% \fi +%% \Gin@viewport@code +%% \Gin@nat@height\Gin@ury bp% +%% \advance\Gin@nat@height-\Gin@lly bp% +%% \Gin@nat@width\Gin@urx bp% +%% \advance\Gin@nat@width-\Gin@llx bp% +%% \Gin@req@sizes +%% \expandafter\ifx\csname Ginclude@#1\endcsname\relax +%% \Gin@drafttrue +%% \expandafter\ifx\csname Gread@#1\endcsname\relax +%% \@latex@error{Can not include graphics of type: #1}\@ehc +%% \global\expandafter\let\csname Gread@#1\endcsname\@empty +%% \fi +%% \fi +%% \leavevmode +%% \ifGin@draft +%% \hb@xt@\Gin@req@width{% +%% \vrule\hss +%% \vbox to \Gin@req@height{% +%% \hrule \@width \Gin@req@width +%% \vss +%% \edef\@tempa{#3}% +%% \rlap{ \ttfamily\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\@tempa}% +%% \vss +%% \hrule}% +%% \hss\vrule}% +%% \else +%% \@addtofilelist{#3}% +%% \ProvidesFile{#3}[Graphic file (type #1)]% +%% \setbox\z@\hbox{\csname Ginclude@#1\endcsname{#3}}% +%% \dp\z@\z@ +%% \ht\z@\Gin@req@height +%% \wd\z@\Gin@req@width +%% \centerline{\fboxrule1pt\fbox{\box\z@}}% + +%% \fi} +%% +%%%% +\def\HHline{% + \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi{\hrule \@height.5pt} \futurelet% + \@tempa\@xhline} +%% +\def\Hline{% + \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\hrule \@height.5pt\futurelet% + \@tempa\@xhline} +%% +\def\colrule{\\[-5.9pt]\Hline\\[-6pt]} +\def\toprule{\\[-10pt]\HHline\\[-6pt]} +\def\botrule{\\\\[-4pt]\HHline} +%% +%% \let\IEEEbiography\IEEEbiographynophoto +%% \let\endIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiographynophoto +%% +\parindent10pt%% +%% +\def\@outputpageaaa{% +\begingroup % the \endgroup is put in by \aftergroup + \let \protect \noexpand + \@resetactivechars + \global\let\@@if@newlist\if@newlist + \global\@newlistfalse + \@parboxrestore + \shipout \vbox{% + \set@typeset@protect + \aftergroup \endgroup + \aftergroup \set@typeset@protect + % correct? or just restore by ending + % the group? + \if@specialpage + \global\@specialpagefalse\@nameuse{ps@\@specialstyle}% + \fi + \if@twoside + \ifodd\count\z@ \let\@thehead\@oddhead \let\@thefoot\@oddfoot + \let\@themargin\oddsidemargin + \else \let\@thehead\@evenhead + \let\@thefoot\@evenfoot \let\@themargin\evensidemargin + \fi + \fi + \reset@font + \normalsize + \normalsfcodes + \let\label\@gobble + \let\index\@gobble + \let\glossary\@gobble + \baselineskip\z@skip \lineskip\z@skip \lineskiplimit\z@ + \@begindvi + \vskip \topmargin + %\ifodd\c@page\else\advance\@themargin\extramargin\fi% + \moveright\@themargin \vbox {% + \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox to\headheight{% + \vfil + \color@hbox + \normalcolor + \hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thehead}% + \color@endbox + }% %% 22 Feb 87 + \dp\@tempboxa \z@ + \box\@tempboxa + \vskip \headsep + \box\@outputbox + \baselineskip \footskip + \color@hbox + \normalcolor + \hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thefoot}% + \color@endbox + }% + }% + \global\let\if@newlist\@@if@newlist + \global \@colht \textheight + \stepcounter{page}% + \let\firstmark\botmark +} +%% +\newif\ifCUPmtlplainloaded +%% \usepackage[fleqn]{amsmath} +%% \@mathmargin=1sp +\newcount\authorcount +\newcount\chkaucount +\newcount\tempcount +\newcount\affcount +\def\affilmark#1{\textsuperscript{#1}} +\long\def\author#1{\global\advance\authorcount\@ne\expandafter\gdef\csname author\romannumeral\the\authorcount\endcsname{#1}} +\long\def\affil#1{\global\advance\affcount\@ne\expandafter\gdef\csname affil\romannumeral\the\affcount\endcsname{#1}} +\long\def\corresp#1{\gdef\@corresp{#1}}\corresp{} +\def\@author{% +\ifnum\authorcount>\z@% + \chkaucount=\authorcount% + \tempcount=\z@% + \loop% + \ifnum\authorcount>\z@% + \advance\tempcount\@ne% + {\authorfont\csname author\romannumeral\the\tempcount\endcsname}% + \advance\authorcount\m@ne% + \ifnum\chkaucount=\tw@% + \ifnum\authorcount>\z@{\authorfont\ AND\ }\fi% + \else% + {\authorfont\ifnum\authorcount>\@ne,\space\else\ifnum\authorcount>\z@,\ AND\ \fi\fi}% + \fi% + \repeat% +\fi% +} +%% +\def\@affil{% +\ifnum\affcount>\z@% + \tempcount=\z@% + \loop% + \ifnum\affcount>\z@% + \advance\tempcount\@ne% + {\afffont\textsuperscript{\the\tempcount}\csname affil\romannumeral\the\tempcount\endcsname\par}% + \advance\affcount\m@ne% + \repeat% +\fi% +} +%% +%% +\def\chapterinitial#1{\noindent{\vrule width9pt height9pt depth0pt}\ {\sffamily\bfseries\scshape #1}} +\usepackage{wrapfig,array} +\newbox\quotebox +\newskip\quoteskp +\newskip\sdquoteskp +\newcount\quotecnt +%% +%% +\def\rhfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{9}{9}\selectfont\bfseries} +\def\qfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{13}{13}\selectfont\bfseries} +\def\qrfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{10}{10}\selectfont} +\def\qbfont{\fontfamily{\sfdefault}\fontsize{12}{12}\selectfont} +\def\OJlogo{\textcolor{ojcolor}{\fboxsep1pt\fboxrule=1pt\fbox{\hbox to 10pc{\hfill\qfont OJ Logo\hfill}}}} +\parskip0pt% +\parindent10pt% +\columnsep12pt +\setlength\footskip{26.5pt}%.35in} +\setlength\footnotesep{6.65\p@} +\setlength{\skip\footins}{12\p@ \@plus 6\p@ \@minus 6\p@}% change + based on FN font height +\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins +\sloppy +\clubpenalty10000 +\widowpenalty10000% +\@lowpenalty 51 +\@medpenalty 151 +\@highpenalty 301 +%% +%% +\AtBeginDocument{% +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \let\@svsec\@empty + \else + \refstepcounter{#1}% + \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% + \fi + \@tempskipa #5\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup + #6{% + {\hskip #3\relax\ifnum #2 = \@ne\textcolor{ojcolor}{\@svsec}\else{\@svsec}\fi}% + \interlinepenalty \@M \ifnum #2 = \@ne\textcolor{ojcolor}{#8}\else{#8}\fi\@@par}% + \endgroup + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \fi + #7}% + \else + \def\@svsechd{% + #6{\hskip #3\relax + \@svsec #8}% + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \fi + #7}}% + \fi + \@xsect{#5}} +%% +\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi + \par + \@tempskipa #4\relax + \@afterindenttrue + \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@ + \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse + \fi + \if@nobreak + \everypar{}% + \else + \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa + \fi + \@ifstar + {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}{#2}}% + {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}} +%% +\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \@tempskipa #3\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup + #4{% + \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}% + \interlinepenalty \@M \ifnum#5=1\textcolor{ojcolor}{#6}\else#6\fi\@@par}% + \endgroup + \else + \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax \ifnum#5=1\textcolor{ojcolor}{#6}\else#6\fi}}% + \fi + \@xsect{#3}} +}%% +%% +\def\UrlBreaks{\do\.\do\@\do\\\do\/\do\!\do\_\do\|\do\;\do\>\do\]% + \do\)\do\,\do\?\do\'\do+\do\=\do\#\do\-}% +\def\UrlBigBreaks{\do\:\do@url@hyp}% +\def\UrlNoBreaks{\do\(\do\[\do\{\do\<}% +% any ordinary characters that aren't usually: +\def\UrlOrds{\do\*\do\-\do\~\do\'\do\"\do\-}% +\def\UrlSpecials{\do\ {\Url@space}\do\%{\Url@percent}\do\^^M{\Url@space}% + \Url@force@Tilde}% package option may force faked text-ascii-tild +%% +\def\footnoterule{\relax%\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule +\kern-5pt +\hbox to \columnwidth{\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} +\kern4.6pt} +%% +\endinput + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEphot.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% That's all folks! + diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri1.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri1.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb29e72 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri1.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri10.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri10.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..836954e Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri10.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri11.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri11.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b365d77 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri11.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri12.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri12.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d2d261f Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri12.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri13.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri13.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5302589 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri13.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri2.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri2.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2efc428 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri2.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri3.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri3.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1a391ff Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri3.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri4.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri4.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0310a3d Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri4.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri5.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri5.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b14245 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri5.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri6.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri6.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c8a4d38 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri6.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri7.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri7.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3e759bd Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri7.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri8.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri8.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cdd48d1 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri8.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/images/schri9.png b/OJ_Template/images/schri9.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..31f0c3a Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/images/schri9.png differ diff --git a/OJ_Template/ojim.png b/OJ_Template/ojim.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000..56eb444 Binary files /dev/null and b/OJ_Template/ojim.png differ